Home | History | Annotate | Line # | Download | only in bfd
elf32-hppa.c revision 1.12
      1   1.1     skrll /* BFD back-end for HP PA-RISC ELF files.
      2  1.11  christos    Copyright (C) 1990-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
      3   1.1     skrll 
      4   1.1     skrll    Original code by
      5   1.1     skrll 	Center for Software Science
      6   1.1     skrll 	Department of Computer Science
      7   1.1     skrll 	University of Utah
      8   1.1     skrll    Largely rewritten by Alan Modra <alan (at) linuxcare.com.au>
      9   1.1     skrll    Naming cleanup by Carlos O'Donell <carlos (at) systemhalted.org>
     10   1.1     skrll    TLS support written by Randolph Chung <tausq (at) debian.org>
     11   1.7  christos 
     12   1.1     skrll    This file is part of BFD, the Binary File Descriptor library.
     13   1.1     skrll 
     14   1.1     skrll    This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
     15   1.1     skrll    it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
     16   1.1     skrll    the Free Software Foundation; either version 3 of the License, or
     17   1.1     skrll    (at your option) any later version.
     18   1.1     skrll 
     19   1.1     skrll    This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
     20   1.1     skrll    but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
     21   1.1     skrll    MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
     22   1.1     skrll    GNU General Public License for more details.
     23   1.1     skrll 
     24   1.1     skrll    You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
     25   1.1     skrll    along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
     26   1.1     skrll    Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street - Fifth Floor, Boston,
     27   1.1     skrll    MA 02110-1301, USA.  */
     28   1.1     skrll 
     29   1.1     skrll #include "sysdep.h"
     30   1.1     skrll #include "bfd.h"
     31   1.1     skrll #include "libbfd.h"
     32   1.1     skrll #include "elf-bfd.h"
     33   1.1     skrll #include "elf/hppa.h"
     34   1.1     skrll #include "libhppa.h"
     35   1.1     skrll #include "elf32-hppa.h"
     36   1.1     skrll #define ARCH_SIZE		32
     37   1.1     skrll #include "elf32-hppa.h"
     38   1.1     skrll #include "elf-hppa.h"
     39   1.1     skrll 
     40   1.1     skrll /* In order to gain some understanding of code in this file without
     41   1.1     skrll    knowing all the intricate details of the linker, note the
     42   1.1     skrll    following:
     43   1.1     skrll 
     44   1.1     skrll    Functions named elf32_hppa_* are called by external routines, other
     45   1.1     skrll    functions are only called locally.  elf32_hppa_* functions appear
     46   1.1     skrll    in this file more or less in the order in which they are called
     47   1.1     skrll    from external routines.  eg. elf32_hppa_check_relocs is called
     48   1.1     skrll    early in the link process, elf32_hppa_finish_dynamic_sections is
     49   1.1     skrll    one of the last functions.  */
     50   1.1     skrll 
     51   1.1     skrll /* We use two hash tables to hold information for linking PA ELF objects.
     52   1.1     skrll 
     53   1.1     skrll    The first is the elf32_hppa_link_hash_table which is derived
     54   1.1     skrll    from the standard ELF linker hash table.  We use this as a place to
     55   1.1     skrll    attach other hash tables and static information.
     56   1.1     skrll 
     57   1.1     skrll    The second is the stub hash table which is derived from the
     58   1.1     skrll    base BFD hash table.  The stub hash table holds the information
     59   1.1     skrll    necessary to build the linker stubs during a link.
     60   1.1     skrll 
     61   1.1     skrll    There are a number of different stubs generated by the linker.
     62   1.1     skrll 
     63   1.1     skrll    Long branch stub:
     64   1.1     skrll    :		ldil LR'X,%r1
     65   1.1     skrll    :		be,n RR'X(%sr4,%r1)
     66   1.1     skrll 
     67   1.1     skrll    PIC long branch stub:
     68   1.1     skrll    :		b,l .+8,%r1
     69   1.1     skrll    :		addil LR'X - ($PIC_pcrel$0 - 4),%r1
     70   1.1     skrll    :		be,n RR'X - ($PIC_pcrel$0 - 8)(%sr4,%r1)
     71   1.1     skrll 
     72   1.1     skrll    Import stub to call shared library routine from normal object file
     73   1.1     skrll    (single sub-space version)
     74   1.1     skrll    :		addil LR'lt_ptr+ltoff,%dp	; get procedure entry point
     75   1.1     skrll    :		ldw RR'lt_ptr+ltoff(%r1),%r21
     76   1.1     skrll    :		bv %r0(%r21)
     77   1.1     skrll    :		ldw RR'lt_ptr+ltoff+4(%r1),%r19	; get new dlt value.
     78   1.1     skrll 
     79   1.1     skrll    Import stub to call shared library routine from shared library
     80   1.1     skrll    (single sub-space version)
     81   1.1     skrll    :		addil LR'ltoff,%r19		; get procedure entry point
     82   1.1     skrll    :		ldw RR'ltoff(%r1),%r21
     83   1.1     skrll    :		bv %r0(%r21)
     84   1.1     skrll    :		ldw RR'ltoff+4(%r1),%r19	; get new dlt value.
     85   1.1     skrll 
     86   1.1     skrll    Import stub to call shared library routine from normal object file
     87   1.1     skrll    (multiple sub-space support)
     88   1.1     skrll    :		addil LR'lt_ptr+ltoff,%dp	; get procedure entry point
     89   1.1     skrll    :		ldw RR'lt_ptr+ltoff(%r1),%r21
     90   1.1     skrll    :		ldw RR'lt_ptr+ltoff+4(%r1),%r19	; get new dlt value.
     91   1.1     skrll    :		ldsid (%r21),%r1
     92   1.1     skrll    :		mtsp %r1,%sr0
     93   1.1     skrll    :		be 0(%sr0,%r21)			; branch to target
     94   1.1     skrll    :		stw %rp,-24(%sp)		; save rp
     95   1.1     skrll 
     96   1.1     skrll    Import stub to call shared library routine from shared library
     97   1.1     skrll    (multiple sub-space support)
     98   1.1     skrll    :		addil LR'ltoff,%r19		; get procedure entry point
     99   1.1     skrll    :		ldw RR'ltoff(%r1),%r21
    100   1.1     skrll    :		ldw RR'ltoff+4(%r1),%r19	; get new dlt value.
    101   1.1     skrll    :		ldsid (%r21),%r1
    102   1.1     skrll    :		mtsp %r1,%sr0
    103   1.1     skrll    :		be 0(%sr0,%r21)			; branch to target
    104   1.1     skrll    :		stw %rp,-24(%sp)		; save rp
    105   1.1     skrll 
    106   1.1     skrll    Export stub to return from shared lib routine (multiple sub-space support)
    107   1.1     skrll    One of these is created for each exported procedure in a shared
    108   1.1     skrll    library (and stored in the shared lib).  Shared lib routines are
    109   1.1     skrll    called via the first instruction in the export stub so that we can
    110   1.1     skrll    do an inter-space return.  Not required for single sub-space.
    111   1.1     skrll    :		bl,n X,%rp			; trap the return
    112   1.1     skrll    :		nop
    113   1.1     skrll    :		ldw -24(%sp),%rp		; restore the original rp
    114   1.1     skrll    :		ldsid (%rp),%r1
    115   1.1     skrll    :		mtsp %r1,%sr0
    116   1.1     skrll    :		be,n 0(%sr0,%rp)		; inter-space return.  */
    117   1.1     skrll 
    118   1.1     skrll 
    119   1.1     skrll /* Variable names follow a coding style.
    120   1.1     skrll    Please follow this (Apps Hungarian) style:
    121   1.1     skrll 
    122  1.11  christos    Structure/Variable			Prefix
    123   1.1     skrll    elf_link_hash_table			"etab"
    124   1.1     skrll    elf_link_hash_entry			"eh"
    125   1.7  christos 
    126   1.1     skrll    elf32_hppa_link_hash_table		"htab"
    127   1.1     skrll    elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry		"hh"
    128   1.1     skrll 
    129   1.1     skrll    bfd_hash_table			"btab"
    130   1.1     skrll    bfd_hash_entry			"bh"
    131   1.7  christos 
    132   1.1     skrll    bfd_hash_table containing stubs	"bstab"
    133   1.1     skrll    elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry		"hsh"
    134   1.1     skrll 
    135   1.1     skrll    Always remember to use GNU Coding Style. */
    136   1.7  christos 
    137   1.1     skrll #define PLT_ENTRY_SIZE 8
    138   1.1     skrll #define GOT_ENTRY_SIZE 4
    139   1.1     skrll #define ELF_DYNAMIC_INTERPRETER "/lib/ld.so.1"
    140   1.1     skrll 
    141   1.1     skrll static const bfd_byte plt_stub[] =
    142   1.1     skrll {
    143   1.1     skrll   0x0e, 0x80, 0x10, 0x96,  /* 1: ldw	0(%r20),%r22		*/
    144   1.1     skrll   0xea, 0xc0, 0xc0, 0x00,  /*    bv	%r0(%r22)		*/
    145   1.1     skrll   0x0e, 0x88, 0x10, 0x95,  /*    ldw	4(%r20),%r21		*/
    146   1.1     skrll #define PLT_STUB_ENTRY (3*4)
    147   1.1     skrll   0xea, 0x9f, 0x1f, 0xdd,  /*    b,l	1b,%r20			*/
    148   1.1     skrll   0xd6, 0x80, 0x1c, 0x1e,  /*    depi	0,31,2,%r20		*/
    149   1.1     skrll   0x00, 0xc0, 0xff, 0xee,  /* 9: .word	fixup_func		*/
    150   1.1     skrll   0xde, 0xad, 0xbe, 0xef   /*    .word	fixup_ltp		*/
    151   1.1     skrll };
    152   1.1     skrll 
    153   1.1     skrll /* Section name for stubs is the associated section name plus this
    154   1.1     skrll    string.  */
    155   1.1     skrll #define STUB_SUFFIX ".stub"
    156   1.1     skrll 
    157   1.1     skrll /* We don't need to copy certain PC- or GP-relative dynamic relocs
    158   1.1     skrll    into a shared object's dynamic section.  All the relocs of the
    159   1.1     skrll    limited class we are interested in, are absolute.  */
    160   1.1     skrll #ifndef RELATIVE_DYNRELOCS
    161   1.1     skrll #define RELATIVE_DYNRELOCS 0
    162   1.1     skrll #define IS_ABSOLUTE_RELOC(r_type) 1
    163  1.11  christos #define pc_dynrelocs(hh) 0
    164   1.1     skrll #endif
    165   1.1     skrll 
    166   1.1     skrll /* If ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS is non-zero, the linker will try to avoid
    167   1.1     skrll    copying dynamic variables from a shared lib into an app's dynbss
    168   1.1     skrll    section, and instead use a dynamic relocation to point into the
    169   1.1     skrll    shared lib.  */
    170   1.1     skrll #define ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS 1
    171   1.1     skrll 
    172   1.1     skrll enum elf32_hppa_stub_type
    173   1.1     skrll {
    174   1.1     skrll   hppa_stub_long_branch,
    175   1.1     skrll   hppa_stub_long_branch_shared,
    176   1.1     skrll   hppa_stub_import,
    177   1.1     skrll   hppa_stub_import_shared,
    178   1.1     skrll   hppa_stub_export,
    179   1.1     skrll   hppa_stub_none
    180   1.1     skrll };
    181   1.1     skrll 
    182   1.1     skrll struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry
    183   1.1     skrll {
    184   1.1     skrll   /* Base hash table entry structure.  */
    185   1.1     skrll   struct bfd_hash_entry bh_root;
    186   1.1     skrll 
    187   1.1     skrll   /* The stub section.  */
    188   1.1     skrll   asection *stub_sec;
    189   1.1     skrll 
    190   1.1     skrll   /* Offset within stub_sec of the beginning of this stub.  */
    191   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma stub_offset;
    192   1.1     skrll 
    193   1.1     skrll   /* Given the symbol's value and its section we can determine its final
    194   1.1     skrll      value when building the stubs (so the stub knows where to jump.  */
    195   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma target_value;
    196   1.1     skrll   asection *target_section;
    197   1.1     skrll 
    198   1.1     skrll   enum elf32_hppa_stub_type stub_type;
    199   1.1     skrll 
    200   1.1     skrll   /* The symbol table entry, if any, that this was derived from.  */
    201   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
    202   1.1     skrll 
    203   1.1     skrll   /* Where this stub is being called from, or, in the case of combined
    204   1.1     skrll      stub sections, the first input section in the group.  */
    205   1.1     skrll   asection *id_sec;
    206   1.1     skrll };
    207   1.1     skrll 
    208  1.11  christos enum _tls_type
    209  1.11  christos   {
    210  1.11  christos     GOT_UNKNOWN = 0,
    211  1.11  christos     GOT_NORMAL = 1,
    212  1.11  christos     GOT_TLS_GD = 2,
    213  1.11  christos     GOT_TLS_LDM = 4,
    214  1.11  christos     GOT_TLS_IE = 8
    215  1.11  christos   };
    216  1.11  christos 
    217   1.1     skrll struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry
    218   1.1     skrll {
    219   1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_entry eh;
    220   1.1     skrll 
    221   1.1     skrll   /* A pointer to the most recently used stub hash entry against this
    222   1.1     skrll      symbol.  */
    223   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh_cache;
    224   1.1     skrll 
    225   1.1     skrll   /* Used to count relocations for delayed sizing of relocation
    226   1.1     skrll      sections.  */
    227  1.11  christos   struct elf_dyn_relocs *dyn_relocs;
    228   1.1     skrll 
    229  1.11  christos   ENUM_BITFIELD (_tls_type) tls_type : 8;
    230   1.1     skrll 
    231   1.1     skrll   /* Set if this symbol is used by a plabel reloc.  */
    232   1.1     skrll   unsigned int plabel:1;
    233   1.1     skrll };
    234   1.1     skrll 
    235   1.1     skrll struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table
    236   1.1     skrll {
    237   1.1     skrll   /* The main hash table.  */
    238   1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_table etab;
    239   1.1     skrll 
    240   1.1     skrll   /* The stub hash table.  */
    241   1.1     skrll   struct bfd_hash_table bstab;
    242   1.1     skrll 
    243   1.1     skrll   /* Linker stub bfd.  */
    244   1.1     skrll   bfd *stub_bfd;
    245   1.1     skrll 
    246   1.1     skrll   /* Linker call-backs.  */
    247   1.1     skrll   asection * (*add_stub_section) (const char *, asection *);
    248   1.1     skrll   void (*layout_sections_again) (void);
    249   1.1     skrll 
    250   1.1     skrll   /* Array to keep track of which stub sections have been created, and
    251   1.1     skrll      information on stub grouping.  */
    252   1.1     skrll   struct map_stub
    253   1.1     skrll   {
    254   1.1     skrll     /* This is the section to which stubs in the group will be
    255   1.1     skrll        attached.  */
    256   1.1     skrll     asection *link_sec;
    257   1.1     skrll     /* The stub section.  */
    258   1.1     skrll     asection *stub_sec;
    259   1.1     skrll   } *stub_group;
    260   1.1     skrll 
    261   1.1     skrll   /* Assorted information used by elf32_hppa_size_stubs.  */
    262   1.1     skrll   unsigned int bfd_count;
    263   1.7  christos   unsigned int top_index;
    264   1.1     skrll   asection **input_list;
    265   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Sym **all_local_syms;
    266   1.1     skrll 
    267   1.1     skrll   /* Used during a final link to store the base of the text and data
    268   1.1     skrll      segments so that we can perform SEGREL relocations.  */
    269   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma text_segment_base;
    270   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma data_segment_base;
    271   1.1     skrll 
    272   1.1     skrll   /* Whether we support multiple sub-spaces for shared libs.  */
    273   1.1     skrll   unsigned int multi_subspace:1;
    274   1.1     skrll 
    275   1.1     skrll   /* Flags set when various size branches are detected.  Used to
    276   1.1     skrll      select suitable defaults for the stub group size.  */
    277   1.1     skrll   unsigned int has_12bit_branch:1;
    278   1.1     skrll   unsigned int has_17bit_branch:1;
    279   1.1     skrll   unsigned int has_22bit_branch:1;
    280   1.1     skrll 
    281   1.1     skrll   /* Set if we need a .plt stub to support lazy dynamic linking.  */
    282   1.1     skrll   unsigned int need_plt_stub:1;
    283   1.1     skrll 
    284   1.3  christos   /* Small local sym cache.  */
    285   1.3  christos   struct sym_cache sym_cache;
    286   1.1     skrll 
    287   1.1     skrll   /* Data for LDM relocations.  */
    288   1.1     skrll   union
    289   1.1     skrll   {
    290   1.1     skrll     bfd_signed_vma refcount;
    291   1.1     skrll     bfd_vma offset;
    292   1.1     skrll   } tls_ldm_got;
    293   1.1     skrll };
    294   1.1     skrll 
    295   1.1     skrll /* Various hash macros and functions.  */
    296   1.1     skrll #define hppa_link_hash_table(p) \
    297   1.3  christos   (elf_hash_table_id ((struct elf_link_hash_table *) ((p)->hash)) \
    298   1.3  christos   == HPPA32_ELF_DATA ? ((struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *) ((p)->hash)) : NULL)
    299   1.1     skrll 
    300   1.1     skrll #define hppa_elf_hash_entry(ent) \
    301   1.1     skrll   ((struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *)(ent))
    302   1.1     skrll 
    303   1.1     skrll #define hppa_stub_hash_entry(ent) \
    304   1.1     skrll   ((struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *)(ent))
    305   1.1     skrll 
    306   1.1     skrll #define hppa_stub_hash_lookup(table, string, create, copy) \
    307   1.1     skrll   ((struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *) \
    308   1.1     skrll    bfd_hash_lookup ((table), (string), (create), (copy)))
    309   1.1     skrll 
    310   1.1     skrll #define hppa_elf_local_got_tls_type(abfd) \
    311   1.1     skrll   ((char *)(elf_local_got_offsets (abfd) + (elf_tdata (abfd)->symtab_hdr.sh_info * 2)))
    312   1.1     skrll 
    313   1.1     skrll #define hh_name(hh) \
    314   1.1     skrll   (hh ? hh->eh.root.root.string : "<undef>")
    315   1.1     skrll 
    316   1.1     skrll #define eh_name(eh) \
    317   1.1     skrll   (eh ? eh->root.root.string : "<undef>")
    318   1.1     skrll 
    319   1.1     skrll /* Assorted hash table functions.  */
    320   1.1     skrll 
    321   1.1     skrll /* Initialize an entry in the stub hash table.  */
    322   1.1     skrll 
    323   1.1     skrll static struct bfd_hash_entry *
    324   1.1     skrll stub_hash_newfunc (struct bfd_hash_entry *entry,
    325   1.1     skrll 		   struct bfd_hash_table *table,
    326   1.1     skrll 		   const char *string)
    327   1.1     skrll {
    328   1.1     skrll   /* Allocate the structure if it has not already been allocated by a
    329   1.1     skrll      subclass.  */
    330   1.1     skrll   if (entry == NULL)
    331   1.1     skrll     {
    332   1.1     skrll       entry = bfd_hash_allocate (table,
    333   1.1     skrll 				 sizeof (struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry));
    334   1.1     skrll       if (entry == NULL)
    335   1.1     skrll 	return entry;
    336   1.1     skrll     }
    337   1.1     skrll 
    338   1.1     skrll   /* Call the allocation method of the superclass.  */
    339   1.1     skrll   entry = bfd_hash_newfunc (entry, table, string);
    340   1.1     skrll   if (entry != NULL)
    341   1.1     skrll     {
    342   1.1     skrll       struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh;
    343   1.1     skrll 
    344   1.1     skrll       /* Initialize the local fields.  */
    345   1.1     skrll       hsh = hppa_stub_hash_entry (entry);
    346   1.1     skrll       hsh->stub_sec = NULL;
    347   1.1     skrll       hsh->stub_offset = 0;
    348   1.1     skrll       hsh->target_value = 0;
    349   1.1     skrll       hsh->target_section = NULL;
    350   1.1     skrll       hsh->stub_type = hppa_stub_long_branch;
    351   1.1     skrll       hsh->hh = NULL;
    352   1.1     skrll       hsh->id_sec = NULL;
    353   1.1     skrll     }
    354   1.1     skrll 
    355   1.1     skrll   return entry;
    356   1.1     skrll }
    357   1.1     skrll 
    358   1.1     skrll /* Initialize an entry in the link hash table.  */
    359   1.1     skrll 
    360   1.1     skrll static struct bfd_hash_entry *
    361   1.1     skrll hppa_link_hash_newfunc (struct bfd_hash_entry *entry,
    362   1.1     skrll 			struct bfd_hash_table *table,
    363   1.1     skrll 			const char *string)
    364   1.1     skrll {
    365   1.1     skrll   /* Allocate the structure if it has not already been allocated by a
    366   1.1     skrll      subclass.  */
    367   1.1     skrll   if (entry == NULL)
    368   1.1     skrll     {
    369   1.1     skrll       entry = bfd_hash_allocate (table,
    370   1.1     skrll 				 sizeof (struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry));
    371   1.1     skrll       if (entry == NULL)
    372   1.1     skrll 	return entry;
    373   1.1     skrll     }
    374   1.1     skrll 
    375   1.1     skrll   /* Call the allocation method of the superclass.  */
    376   1.1     skrll   entry = _bfd_elf_link_hash_newfunc (entry, table, string);
    377   1.1     skrll   if (entry != NULL)
    378   1.1     skrll     {
    379   1.1     skrll       struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
    380   1.1     skrll 
    381   1.1     skrll       /* Initialize the local fields.  */
    382   1.1     skrll       hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (entry);
    383   1.1     skrll       hh->hsh_cache = NULL;
    384   1.1     skrll       hh->dyn_relocs = NULL;
    385   1.1     skrll       hh->plabel = 0;
    386   1.1     skrll       hh->tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN;
    387   1.1     skrll     }
    388   1.1     skrll 
    389   1.1     skrll   return entry;
    390   1.1     skrll }
    391   1.1     skrll 
    392   1.7  christos /* Free the derived linker hash table.  */
    393   1.7  christos 
    394   1.7  christos static void
    395   1.7  christos elf32_hppa_link_hash_table_free (bfd *obfd)
    396   1.7  christos {
    397   1.7  christos   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab
    398   1.7  christos     = (struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *) obfd->link.hash;
    399   1.7  christos 
    400   1.7  christos   bfd_hash_table_free (&htab->bstab);
    401   1.7  christos   _bfd_elf_link_hash_table_free (obfd);
    402   1.7  christos }
    403   1.7  christos 
    404   1.1     skrll /* Create the derived linker hash table.  The PA ELF port uses the derived
    405   1.1     skrll    hash table to keep information specific to the PA ELF linker (without
    406   1.1     skrll    using static variables).  */
    407   1.1     skrll 
    408   1.1     skrll static struct bfd_link_hash_table *
    409   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_link_hash_table_create (bfd *abfd)
    410   1.1     skrll {
    411   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
    412   1.1     skrll   bfd_size_type amt = sizeof (*htab);
    413   1.1     skrll 
    414   1.7  christos   htab = bfd_zmalloc (amt);
    415   1.1     skrll   if (htab == NULL)
    416   1.1     skrll     return NULL;
    417   1.1     skrll 
    418   1.1     skrll   if (!_bfd_elf_link_hash_table_init (&htab->etab, abfd, hppa_link_hash_newfunc,
    419   1.3  christos 				      sizeof (struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry),
    420   1.3  christos 				      HPPA32_ELF_DATA))
    421   1.1     skrll     {
    422   1.1     skrll       free (htab);
    423   1.1     skrll       return NULL;
    424   1.1     skrll     }
    425   1.1     skrll 
    426   1.1     skrll   /* Init the stub hash table too.  */
    427   1.1     skrll   if (!bfd_hash_table_init (&htab->bstab, stub_hash_newfunc,
    428   1.1     skrll 			    sizeof (struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry)))
    429   1.7  christos     {
    430   1.7  christos       _bfd_elf_link_hash_table_free (abfd);
    431   1.7  christos       return NULL;
    432   1.7  christos     }
    433   1.7  christos   htab->etab.root.hash_table_free = elf32_hppa_link_hash_table_free;
    434   1.1     skrll 
    435   1.1     skrll   htab->text_segment_base = (bfd_vma) -1;
    436   1.1     skrll   htab->data_segment_base = (bfd_vma) -1;
    437   1.1     skrll   return &htab->etab.root;
    438   1.1     skrll }
    439   1.1     skrll 
    440  1.10  christos /* Initialize the linker stubs BFD so that we can use it for linker
    441  1.10  christos    created dynamic sections.  */
    442  1.10  christos 
    443  1.10  christos void
    444  1.10  christos elf32_hppa_init_stub_bfd (bfd *abfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
    445  1.10  christos {
    446  1.10  christos   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
    447  1.10  christos 
    448  1.10  christos   elf_elfheader (abfd)->e_ident[EI_CLASS] = ELFCLASS32;
    449  1.10  christos   htab->etab.dynobj = abfd;
    450  1.10  christos }
    451  1.10  christos 
    452   1.1     skrll /* Build a name for an entry in the stub hash table.  */
    453   1.1     skrll 
    454   1.1     skrll static char *
    455   1.1     skrll hppa_stub_name (const asection *input_section,
    456   1.1     skrll 		const asection *sym_sec,
    457   1.1     skrll 		const struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh,
    458   1.1     skrll 		const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela)
    459   1.1     skrll {
    460   1.1     skrll   char *stub_name;
    461   1.1     skrll   bfd_size_type len;
    462   1.1     skrll 
    463   1.1     skrll   if (hh)
    464   1.1     skrll     {
    465   1.1     skrll       len = 8 + 1 + strlen (hh_name (hh)) + 1 + 8 + 1;
    466   1.1     skrll       stub_name = bfd_malloc (len);
    467   1.1     skrll       if (stub_name != NULL)
    468   1.1     skrll 	sprintf (stub_name, "%08x_%s+%x",
    469   1.1     skrll 		 input_section->id & 0xffffffff,
    470   1.1     skrll 		 hh_name (hh),
    471   1.1     skrll 		 (int) rela->r_addend & 0xffffffff);
    472   1.1     skrll     }
    473   1.1     skrll   else
    474   1.1     skrll     {
    475   1.1     skrll       len = 8 + 1 + 8 + 1 + 8 + 1 + 8 + 1;
    476   1.1     skrll       stub_name = bfd_malloc (len);
    477   1.1     skrll       if (stub_name != NULL)
    478   1.1     skrll 	sprintf (stub_name, "%08x_%x:%x+%x",
    479   1.1     skrll 		 input_section->id & 0xffffffff,
    480   1.1     skrll 		 sym_sec->id & 0xffffffff,
    481   1.1     skrll 		 (int) ELF32_R_SYM (rela->r_info) & 0xffffffff,
    482   1.1     skrll 		 (int) rela->r_addend & 0xffffffff);
    483   1.1     skrll     }
    484   1.1     skrll   return stub_name;
    485   1.1     skrll }
    486   1.1     skrll 
    487   1.1     skrll /* Look up an entry in the stub hash.  Stub entries are cached because
    488   1.1     skrll    creating the stub name takes a bit of time.  */
    489   1.1     skrll 
    490   1.1     skrll static struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *
    491   1.1     skrll hppa_get_stub_entry (const asection *input_section,
    492   1.1     skrll 		     const asection *sym_sec,
    493   1.1     skrll 		     struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh,
    494   1.1     skrll 		     const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela,
    495   1.1     skrll 		     struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab)
    496   1.1     skrll {
    497   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh_entry;
    498   1.1     skrll   const asection *id_sec;
    499   1.1     skrll 
    500   1.1     skrll   /* If this input section is part of a group of sections sharing one
    501   1.1     skrll      stub section, then use the id of the first section in the group.
    502   1.1     skrll      Stub names need to include a section id, as there may well be
    503   1.1     skrll      more than one stub used to reach say, printf, and we need to
    504   1.1     skrll      distinguish between them.  */
    505   1.1     skrll   id_sec = htab->stub_group[input_section->id].link_sec;
    506  1.12  christos   if (id_sec == NULL)
    507  1.12  christos     return NULL;
    508   1.1     skrll 
    509   1.1     skrll   if (hh != NULL && hh->hsh_cache != NULL
    510   1.1     skrll       && hh->hsh_cache->hh == hh
    511   1.1     skrll       && hh->hsh_cache->id_sec == id_sec)
    512   1.1     skrll     {
    513   1.1     skrll       hsh_entry = hh->hsh_cache;
    514   1.1     skrll     }
    515   1.1     skrll   else
    516   1.1     skrll     {
    517   1.1     skrll       char *stub_name;
    518   1.1     skrll 
    519   1.1     skrll       stub_name = hppa_stub_name (id_sec, sym_sec, hh, rela);
    520   1.1     skrll       if (stub_name == NULL)
    521   1.1     skrll 	return NULL;
    522   1.1     skrll 
    523   1.1     skrll       hsh_entry = hppa_stub_hash_lookup (&htab->bstab,
    524   1.1     skrll 					  stub_name, FALSE, FALSE);
    525   1.1     skrll       if (hh != NULL)
    526   1.1     skrll 	hh->hsh_cache = hsh_entry;
    527   1.1     skrll 
    528   1.1     skrll       free (stub_name);
    529   1.1     skrll     }
    530   1.1     skrll 
    531   1.1     skrll   return hsh_entry;
    532   1.1     skrll }
    533   1.1     skrll 
    534   1.1     skrll /* Add a new stub entry to the stub hash.  Not all fields of the new
    535   1.1     skrll    stub entry are initialised.  */
    536   1.1     skrll 
    537   1.1     skrll static struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *
    538   1.1     skrll hppa_add_stub (const char *stub_name,
    539   1.1     skrll 	       asection *section,
    540   1.1     skrll 	       struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab)
    541   1.1     skrll {
    542   1.1     skrll   asection *link_sec;
    543   1.1     skrll   asection *stub_sec;
    544   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh;
    545   1.1     skrll 
    546   1.1     skrll   link_sec = htab->stub_group[section->id].link_sec;
    547   1.1     skrll   stub_sec = htab->stub_group[section->id].stub_sec;
    548   1.1     skrll   if (stub_sec == NULL)
    549   1.1     skrll     {
    550   1.1     skrll       stub_sec = htab->stub_group[link_sec->id].stub_sec;
    551   1.1     skrll       if (stub_sec == NULL)
    552   1.1     skrll 	{
    553   1.1     skrll 	  size_t namelen;
    554   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_size_type len;
    555   1.1     skrll 	  char *s_name;
    556   1.1     skrll 
    557   1.1     skrll 	  namelen = strlen (link_sec->name);
    558   1.1     skrll 	  len = namelen + sizeof (STUB_SUFFIX);
    559   1.1     skrll 	  s_name = bfd_alloc (htab->stub_bfd, len);
    560   1.1     skrll 	  if (s_name == NULL)
    561   1.1     skrll 	    return NULL;
    562   1.1     skrll 
    563   1.1     skrll 	  memcpy (s_name, link_sec->name, namelen);
    564   1.1     skrll 	  memcpy (s_name + namelen, STUB_SUFFIX, sizeof (STUB_SUFFIX));
    565   1.1     skrll 	  stub_sec = (*htab->add_stub_section) (s_name, link_sec);
    566   1.1     skrll 	  if (stub_sec == NULL)
    567   1.1     skrll 	    return NULL;
    568   1.1     skrll 	  htab->stub_group[link_sec->id].stub_sec = stub_sec;
    569   1.1     skrll 	}
    570   1.1     skrll       htab->stub_group[section->id].stub_sec = stub_sec;
    571   1.1     skrll     }
    572   1.1     skrll 
    573   1.1     skrll   /* Enter this entry into the linker stub hash table.  */
    574   1.1     skrll   hsh = hppa_stub_hash_lookup (&htab->bstab, stub_name,
    575   1.1     skrll 				      TRUE, FALSE);
    576   1.1     skrll   if (hsh == NULL)
    577   1.1     skrll     {
    578  1.11  christos       /* xgettext:c-format */
    579  1.12  christos       _bfd_error_handler (_("%pB: cannot create stub entry %s"),
    580  1.11  christos 			  section->owner, stub_name);
    581   1.1     skrll       return NULL;
    582   1.1     skrll     }
    583   1.1     skrll 
    584   1.1     skrll   hsh->stub_sec = stub_sec;
    585   1.1     skrll   hsh->stub_offset = 0;
    586   1.1     skrll   hsh->id_sec = link_sec;
    587   1.1     skrll   return hsh;
    588   1.1     skrll }
    589   1.1     skrll 
    590   1.1     skrll /* Determine the type of stub needed, if any, for a call.  */
    591   1.1     skrll 
    592   1.1     skrll static enum elf32_hppa_stub_type
    593   1.1     skrll hppa_type_of_stub (asection *input_sec,
    594   1.1     skrll 		   const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela,
    595   1.1     skrll 		   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh,
    596   1.1     skrll 		   bfd_vma destination,
    597   1.1     skrll 		   struct bfd_link_info *info)
    598   1.1     skrll {
    599   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma location;
    600   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma branch_offset;
    601   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma max_branch_offset;
    602   1.1     skrll   unsigned int r_type;
    603   1.1     skrll 
    604   1.1     skrll   if (hh != NULL
    605   1.1     skrll       && hh->eh.plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1
    606   1.1     skrll       && hh->eh.dynindx != -1
    607   1.1     skrll       && !hh->plabel
    608   1.7  christos       && (bfd_link_pic (info)
    609   1.1     skrll 	  || !hh->eh.def_regular
    610   1.1     skrll 	  || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak))
    611   1.1     skrll     {
    612   1.1     skrll       /* We need an import stub.  Decide between hppa_stub_import
    613   1.1     skrll 	 and hppa_stub_import_shared later.  */
    614   1.1     skrll       return hppa_stub_import;
    615   1.1     skrll     }
    616   1.1     skrll 
    617  1.12  christos   if (destination == (bfd_vma) -1)
    618  1.12  christos     return hppa_stub_none;
    619  1.12  christos 
    620   1.1     skrll   /* Determine where the call point is.  */
    621   1.1     skrll   location = (input_sec->output_offset
    622   1.1     skrll 	      + input_sec->output_section->vma
    623   1.1     skrll 	      + rela->r_offset);
    624   1.1     skrll 
    625   1.1     skrll   branch_offset = destination - location - 8;
    626   1.1     skrll   r_type = ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info);
    627   1.1     skrll 
    628   1.1     skrll   /* Determine if a long branch stub is needed.  parisc branch offsets
    629   1.1     skrll      are relative to the second instruction past the branch, ie. +8
    630   1.1     skrll      bytes on from the branch instruction location.  The offset is
    631   1.1     skrll      signed and counts in units of 4 bytes.  */
    632   1.1     skrll   if (r_type == (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL17F)
    633   1.1     skrll     max_branch_offset = (1 << (17 - 1)) << 2;
    634   1.1     skrll 
    635   1.1     skrll   else if (r_type == (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL12F)
    636   1.1     skrll     max_branch_offset = (1 << (12 - 1)) << 2;
    637   1.1     skrll 
    638   1.1     skrll   else /* R_PARISC_PCREL22F.  */
    639   1.1     skrll     max_branch_offset = (1 << (22 - 1)) << 2;
    640   1.1     skrll 
    641   1.1     skrll   if (branch_offset + max_branch_offset >= 2*max_branch_offset)
    642   1.1     skrll     return hppa_stub_long_branch;
    643   1.1     skrll 
    644   1.1     skrll   return hppa_stub_none;
    645   1.1     skrll }
    646   1.1     skrll 
    647   1.1     skrll /* Build one linker stub as defined by the stub hash table entry GEN_ENTRY.
    648   1.1     skrll    IN_ARG contains the link info pointer.  */
    649   1.1     skrll 
    650   1.1     skrll #define LDIL_R1		0x20200000	/* ldil  LR'XXX,%r1		*/
    651   1.1     skrll #define BE_SR4_R1	0xe0202002	/* be,n  RR'XXX(%sr4,%r1)	*/
    652   1.1     skrll 
    653   1.1     skrll #define BL_R1		0xe8200000	/* b,l   .+8,%r1		*/
    654   1.1     skrll #define ADDIL_R1	0x28200000	/* addil LR'XXX,%r1,%r1		*/
    655   1.1     skrll #define DEPI_R1		0xd4201c1e	/* depi  0,31,2,%r1		*/
    656   1.1     skrll 
    657   1.1     skrll #define ADDIL_DP	0x2b600000	/* addil LR'XXX,%dp,%r1		*/
    658   1.1     skrll #define LDW_R1_R21	0x48350000	/* ldw   RR'XXX(%sr0,%r1),%r21	*/
    659   1.1     skrll #define BV_R0_R21	0xeaa0c000	/* bv    %r0(%r21)		*/
    660   1.1     skrll #define LDW_R1_R19	0x48330000	/* ldw   RR'XXX(%sr0,%r1),%r19	*/
    661   1.1     skrll 
    662   1.1     skrll #define ADDIL_R19	0x2a600000	/* addil LR'XXX,%r19,%r1	*/
    663   1.1     skrll #define LDW_R1_DP	0x483b0000	/* ldw   RR'XXX(%sr0,%r1),%dp	*/
    664   1.1     skrll 
    665   1.1     skrll #define LDSID_R21_R1	0x02a010a1	/* ldsid (%sr0,%r21),%r1	*/
    666   1.1     skrll #define MTSP_R1		0x00011820	/* mtsp  %r1,%sr0		*/
    667   1.1     skrll #define BE_SR0_R21	0xe2a00000	/* be    0(%sr0,%r21)		*/
    668   1.1     skrll #define STW_RP		0x6bc23fd1	/* stw   %rp,-24(%sr0,%sp)	*/
    669   1.1     skrll 
    670   1.1     skrll #define BL22_RP		0xe800a002	/* b,l,n XXX,%rp		*/
    671   1.1     skrll #define BL_RP		0xe8400002	/* b,l,n XXX,%rp		*/
    672   1.1     skrll #define NOP		0x08000240	/* nop				*/
    673   1.1     skrll #define LDW_RP		0x4bc23fd1	/* ldw   -24(%sr0,%sp),%rp	*/
    674   1.1     skrll #define LDSID_RP_R1	0x004010a1	/* ldsid (%sr0,%rp),%r1		*/
    675   1.1     skrll #define BE_SR0_RP	0xe0400002	/* be,n  0(%sr0,%rp)		*/
    676   1.1     skrll 
    677   1.1     skrll #ifndef R19_STUBS
    678   1.1     skrll #define R19_STUBS 1
    679   1.1     skrll #endif
    680   1.1     skrll 
    681   1.1     skrll #if R19_STUBS
    682   1.1     skrll #define LDW_R1_DLT	LDW_R1_R19
    683   1.1     skrll #else
    684   1.1     skrll #define LDW_R1_DLT	LDW_R1_DP
    685   1.1     skrll #endif
    686   1.1     skrll 
    687   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
    688   1.1     skrll hppa_build_one_stub (struct bfd_hash_entry *bh, void *in_arg)
    689   1.1     skrll {
    690   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh;
    691   1.1     skrll   struct bfd_link_info *info;
    692   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
    693   1.1     skrll   asection *stub_sec;
    694   1.1     skrll   bfd *stub_bfd;
    695   1.1     skrll   bfd_byte *loc;
    696   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma sym_value;
    697   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma insn;
    698   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma off;
    699   1.1     skrll   int val;
    700   1.1     skrll   int size;
    701   1.1     skrll 
    702   1.1     skrll   /* Massage our args to the form they really have.  */
    703   1.1     skrll   hsh = hppa_stub_hash_entry (bh);
    704   1.1     skrll   info = (struct bfd_link_info *)in_arg;
    705   1.1     skrll 
    706   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
    707   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
    708   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
    709   1.3  christos 
    710   1.1     skrll   stub_sec = hsh->stub_sec;
    711   1.1     skrll 
    712   1.1     skrll   /* Make a note of the offset within the stubs for this entry.  */
    713   1.1     skrll   hsh->stub_offset = stub_sec->size;
    714   1.1     skrll   loc = stub_sec->contents + hsh->stub_offset;
    715   1.1     skrll 
    716   1.1     skrll   stub_bfd = stub_sec->owner;
    717   1.1     skrll 
    718   1.1     skrll   switch (hsh->stub_type)
    719   1.1     skrll     {
    720   1.1     skrll     case hppa_stub_long_branch:
    721   1.1     skrll       /* Create the long branch.  A long branch is formed with "ldil"
    722   1.1     skrll 	 loading the upper bits of the target address into a register,
    723   1.1     skrll 	 then branching with "be" which adds in the lower bits.
    724   1.1     skrll 	 The "be" has its delay slot nullified.  */
    725   1.1     skrll       sym_value = (hsh->target_value
    726   1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->target_section->output_offset
    727   1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->target_section->output_section->vma);
    728   1.1     skrll 
    729   1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, 0, e_lrsel);
    730   1.1     skrll       insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) LDIL_R1, val, 21);
    731   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc);
    732   1.1     skrll 
    733   1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, 0, e_rrsel) >> 2;
    734   1.1     skrll       insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) BE_SR4_R1, val, 17);
    735   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc + 4);
    736   1.1     skrll 
    737   1.1     skrll       size = 8;
    738   1.1     skrll       break;
    739   1.1     skrll 
    740   1.1     skrll     case hppa_stub_long_branch_shared:
    741   1.1     skrll       /* Branches are relative.  This is where we are going to.  */
    742   1.1     skrll       sym_value = (hsh->target_value
    743   1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->target_section->output_offset
    744   1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->target_section->output_section->vma);
    745   1.1     skrll 
    746   1.1     skrll       /* And this is where we are coming from, more or less.  */
    747   1.1     skrll       sym_value -= (hsh->stub_offset
    748   1.1     skrll 		    + stub_sec->output_offset
    749   1.1     skrll 		    + stub_sec->output_section->vma);
    750   1.1     skrll 
    751   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) BL_R1, loc);
    752   1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, (bfd_signed_vma) -8, e_lrsel);
    753   1.1     skrll       insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) ADDIL_R1, val, 21);
    754   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc + 4);
    755   1.1     skrll 
    756   1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, (bfd_signed_vma) -8, e_rrsel) >> 2;
    757   1.1     skrll       insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) BE_SR4_R1, val, 17);
    758   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc + 8);
    759   1.1     skrll       size = 12;
    760   1.1     skrll       break;
    761   1.1     skrll 
    762   1.1     skrll     case hppa_stub_import:
    763   1.1     skrll     case hppa_stub_import_shared:
    764   1.1     skrll       off = hsh->hh->eh.plt.offset;
    765   1.1     skrll       if (off >= (bfd_vma) -2)
    766   1.1     skrll 	abort ();
    767   1.1     skrll 
    768   1.1     skrll       off &= ~ (bfd_vma) 1;
    769   1.1     skrll       sym_value = (off
    770  1.11  christos 		   + htab->etab.splt->output_offset
    771  1.11  christos 		   + htab->etab.splt->output_section->vma
    772  1.11  christos 		   - elf_gp (htab->etab.splt->output_section->owner));
    773   1.1     skrll 
    774   1.1     skrll       insn = ADDIL_DP;
    775   1.1     skrll #if R19_STUBS
    776   1.1     skrll       if (hsh->stub_type == hppa_stub_import_shared)
    777   1.1     skrll 	insn = ADDIL_R19;
    778   1.1     skrll #endif
    779   1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, 0, e_lrsel),
    780   1.1     skrll       insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) insn, val, 21);
    781   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc);
    782   1.1     skrll 
    783   1.1     skrll       /* It is critical to use lrsel/rrsel here because we are using
    784   1.1     skrll 	 two different offsets (+0 and +4) from sym_value.  If we use
    785   1.1     skrll 	 lsel/rsel then with unfortunate sym_values we will round
    786   1.1     skrll 	 sym_value+4 up to the next 2k block leading to a mis-match
    787   1.1     skrll 	 between the lsel and rsel value.  */
    788   1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, 0, e_rrsel);
    789   1.1     skrll       insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) LDW_R1_R21, val, 14);
    790   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc + 4);
    791   1.1     skrll 
    792   1.1     skrll       if (htab->multi_subspace)
    793   1.1     skrll 	{
    794   1.1     skrll 	  val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, (bfd_signed_vma) 4, e_rrsel);
    795   1.1     skrll 	  insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) LDW_R1_DLT, val, 14);
    796   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc + 8);
    797   1.1     skrll 
    798   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) LDSID_R21_R1, loc + 12);
    799   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) MTSP_R1,      loc + 16);
    800   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) BE_SR0_R21,   loc + 20);
    801   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) STW_RP,       loc + 24);
    802   1.1     skrll 
    803   1.1     skrll 	  size = 28;
    804   1.1     skrll 	}
    805   1.1     skrll       else
    806   1.1     skrll 	{
    807   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) BV_R0_R21, loc + 8);
    808   1.1     skrll 	  val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, (bfd_signed_vma) 4, e_rrsel);
    809   1.1     skrll 	  insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) LDW_R1_DLT, val, 14);
    810   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc + 12);
    811   1.1     skrll 
    812   1.1     skrll 	  size = 16;
    813   1.1     skrll 	}
    814   1.1     skrll 
    815   1.1     skrll       break;
    816   1.1     skrll 
    817   1.1     skrll     case hppa_stub_export:
    818   1.1     skrll       /* Branches are relative.  This is where we are going to.  */
    819   1.1     skrll       sym_value = (hsh->target_value
    820   1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->target_section->output_offset
    821   1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->target_section->output_section->vma);
    822   1.1     skrll 
    823   1.1     skrll       /* And this is where we are coming from.  */
    824   1.1     skrll       sym_value -= (hsh->stub_offset
    825   1.1     skrll 		    + stub_sec->output_offset
    826   1.1     skrll 		    + stub_sec->output_section->vma);
    827   1.1     skrll 
    828   1.1     skrll       if (sym_value - 8 + (1 << (17 + 1)) >= (1 << (17 + 2))
    829   1.1     skrll 	  && (!htab->has_22bit_branch
    830   1.1     skrll 	      || sym_value - 8 + (1 << (22 + 1)) >= (1 << (22 + 2))))
    831   1.1     skrll 	{
    832  1.11  christos 	  _bfd_error_handler
    833  1.11  christos 	    /* xgettext:c-format */
    834  1.12  christos 	    (_("%pB(%pA+%#" PRIx64 "): "
    835  1.12  christos 	       "cannot reach %s, recompile with -ffunction-sections"),
    836   1.1     skrll 	     hsh->target_section->owner,
    837   1.1     skrll 	     stub_sec,
    838  1.12  christos 	     (uint64_t) hsh->stub_offset,
    839   1.1     skrll 	     hsh->bh_root.string);
    840   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
    841   1.1     skrll 	  return FALSE;
    842   1.1     skrll 	}
    843   1.1     skrll 
    844   1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, (bfd_signed_vma) -8, e_fsel) >> 2;
    845   1.1     skrll       if (!htab->has_22bit_branch)
    846   1.1     skrll 	insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) BL_RP, val, 17);
    847   1.1     skrll       else
    848   1.1     skrll 	insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) BL22_RP, val, 22);
    849   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc);
    850   1.1     skrll 
    851  1.11  christos       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) NOP,	   loc + 4);
    852   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) LDW_RP,      loc + 8);
    853   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) LDSID_RP_R1, loc + 12);
    854   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) MTSP_R1,     loc + 16);
    855   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) BE_SR0_RP,   loc + 20);
    856   1.1     skrll 
    857   1.1     skrll       /* Point the function symbol at the stub.  */
    858   1.1     skrll       hsh->hh->eh.root.u.def.section = stub_sec;
    859   1.1     skrll       hsh->hh->eh.root.u.def.value = stub_sec->size;
    860   1.1     skrll 
    861   1.1     skrll       size = 24;
    862   1.1     skrll       break;
    863   1.1     skrll 
    864   1.1     skrll     default:
    865   1.1     skrll       BFD_FAIL ();
    866   1.1     skrll       return FALSE;
    867   1.1     skrll     }
    868   1.1     skrll 
    869   1.1     skrll   stub_sec->size += size;
    870   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
    871   1.1     skrll }
    872   1.1     skrll 
    873   1.1     skrll #undef LDIL_R1
    874   1.1     skrll #undef BE_SR4_R1
    875   1.1     skrll #undef BL_R1
    876   1.1     skrll #undef ADDIL_R1
    877   1.1     skrll #undef DEPI_R1
    878   1.1     skrll #undef LDW_R1_R21
    879   1.1     skrll #undef LDW_R1_DLT
    880   1.1     skrll #undef LDW_R1_R19
    881   1.1     skrll #undef ADDIL_R19
    882   1.1     skrll #undef LDW_R1_DP
    883   1.1     skrll #undef LDSID_R21_R1
    884   1.1     skrll #undef MTSP_R1
    885   1.1     skrll #undef BE_SR0_R21
    886   1.1     skrll #undef STW_RP
    887   1.1     skrll #undef BV_R0_R21
    888   1.1     skrll #undef BL_RP
    889   1.1     skrll #undef NOP
    890   1.1     skrll #undef LDW_RP
    891   1.1     skrll #undef LDSID_RP_R1
    892   1.1     skrll #undef BE_SR0_RP
    893   1.1     skrll 
    894   1.1     skrll /* As above, but don't actually build the stub.  Just bump offset so
    895   1.1     skrll    we know stub section sizes.  */
    896   1.1     skrll 
    897   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
    898   1.1     skrll hppa_size_one_stub (struct bfd_hash_entry *bh, void *in_arg)
    899   1.1     skrll {
    900   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh;
    901   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
    902   1.1     skrll   int size;
    903   1.1     skrll 
    904   1.1     skrll   /* Massage our args to the form they really have.  */
    905   1.1     skrll   hsh = hppa_stub_hash_entry (bh);
    906   1.1     skrll   htab = in_arg;
    907   1.1     skrll 
    908   1.1     skrll   if (hsh->stub_type == hppa_stub_long_branch)
    909   1.1     skrll     size = 8;
    910   1.1     skrll   else if (hsh->stub_type == hppa_stub_long_branch_shared)
    911   1.1     skrll     size = 12;
    912   1.1     skrll   else if (hsh->stub_type == hppa_stub_export)
    913   1.1     skrll     size = 24;
    914   1.1     skrll   else /* hppa_stub_import or hppa_stub_import_shared.  */
    915   1.1     skrll     {
    916   1.1     skrll       if (htab->multi_subspace)
    917   1.1     skrll 	size = 28;
    918   1.1     skrll       else
    919   1.1     skrll 	size = 16;
    920   1.1     skrll     }
    921   1.1     skrll 
    922   1.1     skrll   hsh->stub_sec->size += size;
    923   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
    924   1.1     skrll }
    925   1.1     skrll 
    926   1.1     skrll /* Return nonzero if ABFD represents an HPPA ELF32 file.
    927   1.1     skrll    Additionally we set the default architecture and machine.  */
    928   1.1     skrll 
    929   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
    930   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_object_p (bfd *abfd)
    931   1.1     skrll {
    932   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Ehdr * i_ehdrp;
    933   1.1     skrll   unsigned int flags;
    934   1.1     skrll 
    935   1.1     skrll   i_ehdrp = elf_elfheader (abfd);
    936   1.1     skrll   if (strcmp (bfd_get_target (abfd), "elf32-hppa-linux") == 0)
    937   1.1     skrll     {
    938   1.6  christos       /* GCC on hppa-linux produces binaries with OSABI=GNU,
    939   1.1     skrll 	 but the kernel produces corefiles with OSABI=SysV.  */
    940   1.6  christos       if (i_ehdrp->e_ident[EI_OSABI] != ELFOSABI_GNU &&
    941   1.1     skrll 	  i_ehdrp->e_ident[EI_OSABI] != ELFOSABI_NONE) /* aka SYSV */
    942   1.1     skrll 	return FALSE;
    943   1.1     skrll     }
    944   1.1     skrll   else if (strcmp (bfd_get_target (abfd), "elf32-hppa-netbsd") == 0)
    945   1.1     skrll     {
    946   1.1     skrll       /* GCC on hppa-netbsd produces binaries with OSABI=NetBSD,
    947   1.1     skrll 	 but the kernel produces corefiles with OSABI=SysV.  */
    948   1.1     skrll       if (i_ehdrp->e_ident[EI_OSABI] != ELFOSABI_NETBSD &&
    949   1.1     skrll 	  i_ehdrp->e_ident[EI_OSABI] != ELFOSABI_NONE) /* aka SYSV */
    950   1.1     skrll 	return FALSE;
    951   1.1     skrll     }
    952   1.1     skrll   else
    953   1.1     skrll     {
    954   1.1     skrll       if (i_ehdrp->e_ident[EI_OSABI] != ELFOSABI_HPUX)
    955   1.1     skrll 	return FALSE;
    956   1.1     skrll     }
    957   1.1     skrll 
    958   1.1     skrll   flags = i_ehdrp->e_flags;
    959   1.1     skrll   switch (flags & (EF_PARISC_ARCH | EF_PARISC_WIDE))
    960   1.1     skrll     {
    961   1.1     skrll     case EFA_PARISC_1_0:
    962   1.1     skrll       return bfd_default_set_arch_mach (abfd, bfd_arch_hppa, 10);
    963   1.1     skrll     case EFA_PARISC_1_1:
    964   1.1     skrll       return bfd_default_set_arch_mach (abfd, bfd_arch_hppa, 11);
    965   1.1     skrll     case EFA_PARISC_2_0:
    966   1.1     skrll       return bfd_default_set_arch_mach (abfd, bfd_arch_hppa, 20);
    967   1.1     skrll     case EFA_PARISC_2_0 | EF_PARISC_WIDE:
    968   1.1     skrll       return bfd_default_set_arch_mach (abfd, bfd_arch_hppa, 25);
    969   1.1     skrll     }
    970   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
    971   1.1     skrll }
    972   1.1     skrll 
    973   1.1     skrll /* Create the .plt and .got sections, and set up our hash table
    974   1.1     skrll    short-cuts to various dynamic sections.  */
    975   1.1     skrll 
    976   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
    977   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_create_dynamic_sections (bfd *abfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
    978   1.1     skrll {
    979   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
    980   1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh;
    981   1.1     skrll 
    982   1.1     skrll   /* Don't try to create the .plt and .got twice.  */
    983   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
    984   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
    985   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
    986  1.11  christos   if (htab->etab.splt != NULL)
    987   1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
    988   1.1     skrll 
    989   1.1     skrll   /* Call the generic code to do most of the work.  */
    990   1.1     skrll   if (! _bfd_elf_create_dynamic_sections (abfd, info))
    991   1.1     skrll     return FALSE;
    992   1.1     skrll 
    993   1.1     skrll   /* hppa-linux needs _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ to be visible from the main
    994   1.1     skrll      application, because __canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare needs it.  */
    995   1.1     skrll   eh = elf_hash_table (info)->hgot;
    996   1.1     skrll   eh->forced_local = 0;
    997   1.1     skrll   eh->other = STV_DEFAULT;
    998   1.1     skrll   return bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, eh);
    999   1.1     skrll }
   1000   1.1     skrll 
   1001   1.1     skrll /* Copy the extra info we tack onto an elf_link_hash_entry.  */
   1002   1.1     skrll 
   1003   1.1     skrll static void
   1004   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_copy_indirect_symbol (struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1005   1.1     skrll 				 struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh_dir,
   1006   1.1     skrll 				 struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh_ind)
   1007   1.1     skrll {
   1008   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh_dir, *hh_ind;
   1009   1.1     skrll 
   1010   1.1     skrll   hh_dir = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh_dir);
   1011   1.1     skrll   hh_ind = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh_ind);
   1012   1.1     skrll 
   1013  1.11  christos   if (hh_ind->dyn_relocs != NULL
   1014  1.11  christos       && eh_ind->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect)
   1015   1.1     skrll     {
   1016   1.1     skrll       if (hh_dir->dyn_relocs != NULL)
   1017   1.1     skrll 	{
   1018  1.11  christos 	  struct elf_dyn_relocs **hdh_pp;
   1019  1.11  christos 	  struct elf_dyn_relocs *hdh_p;
   1020   1.1     skrll 
   1021   1.1     skrll 	  /* Add reloc counts against the indirect sym to the direct sym
   1022   1.1     skrll 	     list.  Merge any entries against the same section.  */
   1023   1.1     skrll 	  for (hdh_pp = &hh_ind->dyn_relocs; (hdh_p = *hdh_pp) != NULL; )
   1024   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1025  1.11  christos 	      struct elf_dyn_relocs *hdh_q;
   1026   1.1     skrll 
   1027   1.1     skrll 	      for (hdh_q = hh_dir->dyn_relocs;
   1028   1.1     skrll 		   hdh_q != NULL;
   1029  1.11  christos 		   hdh_q = hdh_q->next)
   1030   1.1     skrll 		if (hdh_q->sec == hdh_p->sec)
   1031   1.1     skrll 		  {
   1032   1.1     skrll #if RELATIVE_DYNRELOCS
   1033  1.11  christos 		    hdh_q->pc_count += hdh_p->pc_count;
   1034   1.1     skrll #endif
   1035   1.1     skrll 		    hdh_q->count += hdh_p->count;
   1036  1.11  christos 		    *hdh_pp = hdh_p->next;
   1037   1.1     skrll 		    break;
   1038   1.1     skrll 		  }
   1039   1.1     skrll 	      if (hdh_q == NULL)
   1040  1.11  christos 		hdh_pp = &hdh_p->next;
   1041   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1042   1.1     skrll 	  *hdh_pp = hh_dir->dyn_relocs;
   1043   1.1     skrll 	}
   1044   1.1     skrll 
   1045   1.1     skrll       hh_dir->dyn_relocs = hh_ind->dyn_relocs;
   1046   1.1     skrll       hh_ind->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   1047   1.1     skrll     }
   1048   1.1     skrll 
   1049  1.11  christos   if (eh_ind->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect)
   1050   1.1     skrll     {
   1051  1.11  christos       hh_dir->plabel |= hh_ind->plabel;
   1052  1.11  christos       hh_dir->tls_type |= hh_ind->tls_type;
   1053  1.11  christos       hh_ind->tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN;
   1054   1.1     skrll     }
   1055   1.1     skrll 
   1056  1.11  christos   _bfd_elf_link_hash_copy_indirect (info, eh_dir, eh_ind);
   1057   1.1     skrll }
   1058   1.1     skrll 
   1059   1.1     skrll static int
   1060   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_optimized_tls_reloc (struct bfd_link_info *info ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
   1061   1.1     skrll 				int r_type, int is_local ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
   1062   1.1     skrll {
   1063   1.1     skrll   /* For now we don't support linker optimizations.  */
   1064   1.1     skrll   return r_type;
   1065   1.1     skrll }
   1066   1.1     skrll 
   1067   1.3  christos /* Return a pointer to the local GOT, PLT and TLS reference counts
   1068   1.3  christos    for ABFD.  Returns NULL if the storage allocation fails.  */
   1069   1.3  christos 
   1070   1.3  christos static bfd_signed_vma *
   1071   1.3  christos hppa32_elf_local_refcounts (bfd *abfd)
   1072   1.3  christos {
   1073   1.3  christos   Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr = &elf_tdata (abfd)->symtab_hdr;
   1074   1.3  christos   bfd_signed_vma *local_refcounts;
   1075   1.7  christos 
   1076   1.3  christos   local_refcounts = elf_local_got_refcounts (abfd);
   1077   1.3  christos   if (local_refcounts == NULL)
   1078   1.3  christos     {
   1079   1.3  christos       bfd_size_type size;
   1080   1.3  christos 
   1081   1.3  christos       /* Allocate space for local GOT and PLT reference
   1082   1.3  christos 	 counts.  Done this way to save polluting elf_obj_tdata
   1083   1.3  christos 	 with another target specific pointer.  */
   1084   1.3  christos       size = symtab_hdr->sh_info;
   1085   1.3  christos       size *= 2 * sizeof (bfd_signed_vma);
   1086   1.3  christos       /* Add in space to store the local GOT TLS types.  */
   1087   1.3  christos       size += symtab_hdr->sh_info;
   1088   1.3  christos       local_refcounts = bfd_zalloc (abfd, size);
   1089   1.3  christos       if (local_refcounts == NULL)
   1090   1.3  christos 	return NULL;
   1091   1.3  christos       elf_local_got_refcounts (abfd) = local_refcounts;
   1092   1.3  christos       memset (hppa_elf_local_got_tls_type (abfd), GOT_UNKNOWN,
   1093   1.3  christos 	      symtab_hdr->sh_info);
   1094   1.3  christos     }
   1095   1.3  christos   return local_refcounts;
   1096   1.3  christos }
   1097   1.3  christos 
   1098   1.3  christos 
   1099   1.1     skrll /* Look through the relocs for a section during the first phase, and
   1100   1.1     skrll    calculate needed space in the global offset table, procedure linkage
   1101   1.1     skrll    table, and dynamic reloc sections.  At this point we haven't
   1102   1.1     skrll    necessarily read all the input files.  */
   1103   1.1     skrll 
   1104   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1105   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_check_relocs (bfd *abfd,
   1106   1.1     skrll 			 struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1107   1.1     skrll 			 asection *sec,
   1108   1.1     skrll 			 const Elf_Internal_Rela *relocs)
   1109   1.1     skrll {
   1110   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   1111   1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_entry **eh_syms;
   1112   1.1     skrll   const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela;
   1113   1.1     skrll   const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela_end;
   1114   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   1115   1.1     skrll   asection *sreloc;
   1116   1.1     skrll 
   1117   1.7  christos   if (bfd_link_relocatable (info))
   1118   1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   1119   1.1     skrll 
   1120   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   1121   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   1122   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   1123   1.1     skrll   symtab_hdr = &elf_tdata (abfd)->symtab_hdr;
   1124   1.1     skrll   eh_syms = elf_sym_hashes (abfd);
   1125   1.1     skrll   sreloc = NULL;
   1126   1.1     skrll 
   1127   1.1     skrll   rela_end = relocs + sec->reloc_count;
   1128   1.1     skrll   for (rela = relocs; rela < rela_end; rela++)
   1129   1.1     skrll     {
   1130   1.1     skrll       enum {
   1131   1.1     skrll 	NEED_GOT = 1,
   1132   1.1     skrll 	NEED_PLT = 2,
   1133   1.1     skrll 	NEED_DYNREL = 4,
   1134   1.1     skrll 	PLT_PLABEL = 8
   1135   1.1     skrll       };
   1136   1.1     skrll 
   1137   1.1     skrll       unsigned int r_symndx, r_type;
   1138   1.1     skrll       struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   1139   1.1     skrll       int need_entry = 0;
   1140   1.1     skrll 
   1141   1.1     skrll       r_symndx = ELF32_R_SYM (rela->r_info);
   1142   1.1     skrll 
   1143   1.1     skrll       if (r_symndx < symtab_hdr->sh_info)
   1144   1.1     skrll 	hh = NULL;
   1145   1.1     skrll       else
   1146   1.1     skrll 	{
   1147   1.1     skrll 	  hh =  hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh_syms[r_symndx - symtab_hdr->sh_info]);
   1148   1.1     skrll 	  while (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect
   1149   1.1     skrll 		 || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_warning)
   1150   1.1     skrll 	    hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (hh->eh.root.u.i.link);
   1151   1.1     skrll 	}
   1152   1.1     skrll 
   1153   1.1     skrll       r_type = ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info);
   1154   1.1     skrll       r_type = elf32_hppa_optimized_tls_reloc (info, r_type, hh == NULL);
   1155   1.1     skrll 
   1156   1.1     skrll       switch (r_type)
   1157   1.1     skrll 	{
   1158   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND14F:
   1159   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND14R:
   1160   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND21L:
   1161   1.1     skrll 	  /* This symbol requires a global offset table entry.  */
   1162   1.1     skrll 	  need_entry = NEED_GOT;
   1163   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1164   1.1     skrll 
   1165   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL14R: /* "Official" procedure labels.  */
   1166   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL21L:
   1167   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL32:
   1168   1.1     skrll 	  /* If the addend is non-zero, we break badly.  */
   1169   1.1     skrll 	  if (rela->r_addend != 0)
   1170   1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   1171   1.1     skrll 
   1172   1.1     skrll 	  /* If we are creating a shared library, then we need to
   1173   1.1     skrll 	     create a PLT entry for all PLABELs, because PLABELs with
   1174   1.1     skrll 	     local symbols may be passed via a pointer to another
   1175   1.1     skrll 	     object.  Additionally, output a dynamic relocation
   1176   1.1     skrll 	     pointing to the PLT entry.
   1177   1.1     skrll 
   1178   1.1     skrll 	     For executables, the original 32-bit ABI allowed two
   1179   1.1     skrll 	     different styles of PLABELs (function pointers):  For
   1180   1.1     skrll 	     global functions, the PLABEL word points into the .plt
   1181   1.1     skrll 	     two bytes past a (function address, gp) pair, and for
   1182   1.1     skrll 	     local functions the PLABEL points directly at the
   1183   1.1     skrll 	     function.  The magic +2 for the first type allows us to
   1184   1.1     skrll 	     differentiate between the two.  As you can imagine, this
   1185   1.1     skrll 	     is a real pain when it comes to generating code to call
   1186   1.1     skrll 	     functions indirectly or to compare function pointers.
   1187   1.1     skrll 	     We avoid the mess by always pointing a PLABEL into the
   1188   1.1     skrll 	     .plt, even for local functions.  */
   1189  1.11  christos 	  need_entry = PLT_PLABEL | NEED_PLT;
   1190  1.11  christos 	  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   1191  1.11  christos 	    need_entry |= NEED_DYNREL;
   1192   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1193   1.1     skrll 
   1194   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL12F:
   1195   1.1     skrll 	  htab->has_12bit_branch = 1;
   1196   1.1     skrll 	  goto branch_common;
   1197   1.1     skrll 
   1198   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL17C:
   1199   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL17F:
   1200   1.1     skrll 	  htab->has_17bit_branch = 1;
   1201   1.1     skrll 	  goto branch_common;
   1202   1.1     skrll 
   1203   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL22F:
   1204   1.1     skrll 	  htab->has_22bit_branch = 1;
   1205   1.1     skrll 	branch_common:
   1206   1.1     skrll 	  /* Function calls might need to go through the .plt, and
   1207   1.1     skrll 	     might require long branch stubs.  */
   1208   1.1     skrll 	  if (hh == NULL)
   1209   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1210   1.1     skrll 	      /* We know local syms won't need a .plt entry, and if
   1211   1.1     skrll 		 they need a long branch stub we can't guarantee that
   1212   1.1     skrll 		 we can reach the stub.  So just flag an error later
   1213   1.1     skrll 		 if we're doing a shared link and find we need a long
   1214   1.1     skrll 		 branch stub.  */
   1215   1.1     skrll 	      continue;
   1216   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1217   1.1     skrll 	  else
   1218   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1219   1.1     skrll 	      /* Global symbols will need a .plt entry if they remain
   1220   1.1     skrll 		 global, and in most cases won't need a long branch
   1221   1.1     skrll 		 stub.  Unfortunately, we have to cater for the case
   1222   1.1     skrll 		 where a symbol is forced local by versioning, or due
   1223   1.1     skrll 		 to symbolic linking, and we lose the .plt entry.  */
   1224   1.1     skrll 	      need_entry = NEED_PLT;
   1225   1.1     skrll 	      if (hh->eh.type == STT_PARISC_MILLI)
   1226   1.1     skrll 		need_entry = 0;
   1227   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1228   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1229   1.1     skrll 
   1230   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_SEGBASE:  /* Used to set segment base.  */
   1231   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_SEGREL32: /* Relative reloc, used for unwind.  */
   1232   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL14F: /* PC relative load/store.  */
   1233   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL14R:
   1234   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL17R: /* External branches.  */
   1235   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL21L: /* As above, and for load/store too.  */
   1236   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL32:
   1237   1.1     skrll 	  /* We don't need to propagate the relocation if linking a
   1238   1.1     skrll 	     shared object since these are section relative.  */
   1239   1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   1240   1.1     skrll 
   1241   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DPREL14F: /* Used for gp rel data load/store.  */
   1242   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DPREL14R:
   1243   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DPREL21L:
   1244   1.7  christos 	  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   1245   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1246  1.11  christos 	      _bfd_error_handler
   1247  1.11  christos 		/* xgettext:c-format */
   1248  1.12  christos 		(_("%pB: relocation %s can not be used when making a shared object; recompile with -fPIC"),
   1249   1.1     skrll 		 abfd,
   1250   1.1     skrll 		 elf_hppa_howto_table[r_type].name);
   1251   1.1     skrll 	      bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   1252   1.1     skrll 	      return FALSE;
   1253   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1254   1.1     skrll 	  /* Fall through.  */
   1255   1.1     skrll 
   1256   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR17F: /* Used for external branches.  */
   1257   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR17R:
   1258   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR14F: /* Used for load/store from absolute locn.  */
   1259   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR14R:
   1260   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR21L: /* As above, and for ext branches too.  */
   1261   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR32: /* .word relocs.  */
   1262   1.1     skrll 	  /* We may want to output a dynamic relocation later.  */
   1263   1.1     skrll 	  need_entry = NEED_DYNREL;
   1264   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1265   1.1     skrll 
   1266   1.1     skrll 	  /* This relocation describes the C++ object vtable hierarchy.
   1267   1.1     skrll 	     Reconstruct it for later use during GC.  */
   1268   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_GNU_VTINHERIT:
   1269   1.1     skrll 	  if (!bfd_elf_gc_record_vtinherit (abfd, sec, &hh->eh, rela->r_offset))
   1270   1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   1271   1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   1272   1.1     skrll 
   1273   1.1     skrll 	  /* This relocation describes which C++ vtable entries are actually
   1274   1.1     skrll 	     used.  Record for later use during GC.  */
   1275   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_GNU_VTENTRY:
   1276   1.1     skrll 	  BFD_ASSERT (hh != NULL);
   1277   1.1     skrll 	  if (hh != NULL
   1278   1.1     skrll 	      && !bfd_elf_gc_record_vtentry (abfd, sec, &hh->eh, rela->r_addend))
   1279   1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   1280   1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   1281   1.1     skrll 
   1282   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L:
   1283   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R:
   1284   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L:
   1285   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R:
   1286   1.1     skrll 	  need_entry = NEED_GOT;
   1287   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1288   1.1     skrll 
   1289   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L:
   1290   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_IE14R:
   1291  1.11  christos 	  if (bfd_link_dll (info))
   1292  1.11  christos 	    info->flags |= DF_STATIC_TLS;
   1293   1.1     skrll 	  need_entry = NEED_GOT;
   1294   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1295   1.1     skrll 
   1296   1.1     skrll 	default:
   1297   1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   1298   1.1     skrll 	}
   1299   1.1     skrll 
   1300   1.1     skrll       /* Now carry out our orders.  */
   1301   1.1     skrll       if (need_entry & NEED_GOT)
   1302   1.1     skrll 	{
   1303  1.11  christos 	  int tls_type = GOT_NORMAL;
   1304  1.11  christos 
   1305   1.1     skrll 	  switch (r_type)
   1306   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1307   1.1     skrll 	    default:
   1308   1.1     skrll 	      break;
   1309   1.1     skrll 	    case R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L:
   1310   1.1     skrll 	    case R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R:
   1311  1.11  christos 	      tls_type = GOT_TLS_GD;
   1312   1.1     skrll 	      break;
   1313   1.1     skrll 	    case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L:
   1314   1.1     skrll 	    case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R:
   1315  1.11  christos 	      tls_type = GOT_TLS_LDM;
   1316   1.1     skrll 	      break;
   1317   1.1     skrll 	    case R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L:
   1318   1.1     skrll 	    case R_PARISC_TLS_IE14R:
   1319  1.11  christos 	      tls_type = GOT_TLS_IE;
   1320   1.1     skrll 	      break;
   1321   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1322   1.1     skrll 
   1323   1.1     skrll 	  /* Allocate space for a GOT entry, as well as a dynamic
   1324   1.1     skrll 	     relocation for this entry.  */
   1325  1.11  christos 	  if (htab->etab.sgot == NULL)
   1326   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1327   1.1     skrll 	      if (!elf32_hppa_create_dynamic_sections (htab->etab.dynobj, info))
   1328   1.1     skrll 		return FALSE;
   1329   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1330   1.1     skrll 
   1331  1.11  christos 	  if (hh != NULL)
   1332  1.11  christos 	    {
   1333  1.11  christos 	      if (tls_type == GOT_TLS_LDM)
   1334  1.11  christos 		htab->tls_ldm_got.refcount += 1;
   1335  1.11  christos 	      else
   1336  1.11  christos 		hh->eh.got.refcount += 1;
   1337  1.11  christos 	      hh->tls_type |= tls_type;
   1338  1.11  christos 	    }
   1339   1.1     skrll 	  else
   1340   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1341  1.11  christos 	      bfd_signed_vma *local_got_refcounts;
   1342  1.11  christos 
   1343  1.11  christos 	      /* This is a global offset table entry for a local symbol.  */
   1344  1.11  christos 	      local_got_refcounts = hppa32_elf_local_refcounts (abfd);
   1345  1.11  christos 	      if (local_got_refcounts == NULL)
   1346  1.11  christos 		return FALSE;
   1347  1.11  christos 	      if (tls_type == GOT_TLS_LDM)
   1348  1.11  christos 		htab->tls_ldm_got.refcount += 1;
   1349   1.1     skrll 	      else
   1350  1.11  christos 		local_got_refcounts[r_symndx] += 1;
   1351   1.1     skrll 
   1352  1.11  christos 	      hppa_elf_local_got_tls_type (abfd) [r_symndx] |= tls_type;
   1353   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1354   1.1     skrll 	}
   1355   1.1     skrll 
   1356   1.1     skrll       if (need_entry & NEED_PLT)
   1357   1.1     skrll 	{
   1358   1.1     skrll 	  /* If we are creating a shared library, and this is a reloc
   1359   1.1     skrll 	     against a weak symbol or a global symbol in a dynamic
   1360   1.1     skrll 	     object, then we will be creating an import stub and a
   1361   1.1     skrll 	     .plt entry for the symbol.  Similarly, on a normal link
   1362   1.1     skrll 	     to symbols defined in a dynamic object we'll need the
   1363   1.1     skrll 	     import stub and a .plt entry.  We don't know yet whether
   1364   1.1     skrll 	     the symbol is defined or not, so make an entry anyway and
   1365   1.1     skrll 	     clean up later in adjust_dynamic_symbol.  */
   1366   1.1     skrll 	  if ((sec->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0)
   1367   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1368   1.1     skrll 	      if (hh != NULL)
   1369   1.1     skrll 		{
   1370   1.1     skrll 		  hh->eh.needs_plt = 1;
   1371   1.1     skrll 		  hh->eh.plt.refcount += 1;
   1372   1.1     skrll 
   1373   1.1     skrll 		  /* If this .plt entry is for a plabel, mark it so
   1374   1.1     skrll 		     that adjust_dynamic_symbol will keep the entry
   1375   1.1     skrll 		     even if it appears to be local.  */
   1376   1.1     skrll 		  if (need_entry & PLT_PLABEL)
   1377   1.1     skrll 		    hh->plabel = 1;
   1378   1.1     skrll 		}
   1379   1.1     skrll 	      else if (need_entry & PLT_PLABEL)
   1380   1.1     skrll 		{
   1381   1.1     skrll 		  bfd_signed_vma *local_got_refcounts;
   1382   1.1     skrll 		  bfd_signed_vma *local_plt_refcounts;
   1383   1.1     skrll 
   1384   1.3  christos 		  local_got_refcounts = hppa32_elf_local_refcounts (abfd);
   1385   1.1     skrll 		  if (local_got_refcounts == NULL)
   1386   1.3  christos 		    return FALSE;
   1387   1.1     skrll 		  local_plt_refcounts = (local_got_refcounts
   1388   1.1     skrll 					 + symtab_hdr->sh_info);
   1389   1.1     skrll 		  local_plt_refcounts[r_symndx] += 1;
   1390   1.1     skrll 		}
   1391   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1392   1.1     skrll 	}
   1393   1.1     skrll 
   1394  1.11  christos       if ((need_entry & NEED_DYNREL) != 0
   1395  1.11  christos 	  && (sec->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0)
   1396   1.1     skrll 	{
   1397   1.1     skrll 	  /* Flag this symbol as having a non-got, non-plt reference
   1398   1.1     skrll 	     so that we generate copy relocs if it turns out to be
   1399   1.1     skrll 	     dynamic.  */
   1400  1.11  christos 	  if (hh != NULL)
   1401   1.1     skrll 	    hh->eh.non_got_ref = 1;
   1402   1.1     skrll 
   1403   1.1     skrll 	  /* If we are creating a shared library then we need to copy
   1404   1.1     skrll 	     the reloc into the shared library.  However, if we are
   1405   1.1     skrll 	     linking with -Bsymbolic, we need only copy absolute
   1406   1.1     skrll 	     relocs or relocs against symbols that are not defined in
   1407   1.1     skrll 	     an object we are including in the link.  PC- or DP- or
   1408   1.1     skrll 	     DLT-relative relocs against any local sym or global sym
   1409   1.1     skrll 	     with DEF_REGULAR set, can be discarded.  At this point we
   1410   1.1     skrll 	     have not seen all the input files, so it is possible that
   1411   1.1     skrll 	     DEF_REGULAR is not set now but will be set later (it is
   1412   1.1     skrll 	     never cleared).  We account for that possibility below by
   1413   1.1     skrll 	     storing information in the dyn_relocs field of the
   1414   1.1     skrll 	     hash table entry.
   1415   1.1     skrll 
   1416   1.1     skrll 	     A similar situation to the -Bsymbolic case occurs when
   1417   1.1     skrll 	     creating shared libraries and symbol visibility changes
   1418   1.1     skrll 	     render the symbol local.
   1419   1.1     skrll 
   1420   1.1     skrll 	     As it turns out, all the relocs we will be creating here
   1421   1.1     skrll 	     are absolute, so we cannot remove them on -Bsymbolic
   1422   1.1     skrll 	     links or visibility changes anyway.  A STUB_REL reloc
   1423   1.1     skrll 	     is absolute too, as in that case it is the reloc in the
   1424   1.1     skrll 	     stub we will be creating, rather than copying the PCREL
   1425   1.1     skrll 	     reloc in the branch.
   1426   1.1     skrll 
   1427   1.1     skrll 	     If on the other hand, we are creating an executable, we
   1428   1.1     skrll 	     may need to keep relocations for symbols satisfied by a
   1429   1.1     skrll 	     dynamic library if we manage to avoid copy relocs for the
   1430   1.1     skrll 	     symbol.  */
   1431   1.7  christos 	  if ((bfd_link_pic (info)
   1432   1.1     skrll 	       && (IS_ABSOLUTE_RELOC (r_type)
   1433   1.1     skrll 		   || (hh != NULL
   1434   1.7  christos 		       && (!SYMBOLIC_BIND (info, &hh->eh)
   1435   1.1     skrll 			   || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak
   1436   1.1     skrll 			   || !hh->eh.def_regular))))
   1437   1.1     skrll 	      || (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS
   1438   1.7  christos 		  && !bfd_link_pic (info)
   1439   1.1     skrll 		  && hh != NULL
   1440   1.1     skrll 		  && (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak
   1441   1.1     skrll 		      || !hh->eh.def_regular)))
   1442   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1443  1.11  christos 	      struct elf_dyn_relocs *hdh_p;
   1444  1.11  christos 	      struct elf_dyn_relocs **hdh_head;
   1445   1.1     skrll 
   1446   1.1     skrll 	      /* Create a reloc section in dynobj and make room for
   1447   1.1     skrll 		 this reloc.  */
   1448   1.1     skrll 	      if (sreloc == NULL)
   1449   1.1     skrll 		{
   1450   1.3  christos 		  sreloc = _bfd_elf_make_dynamic_reloc_section
   1451   1.3  christos 		    (sec, htab->etab.dynobj, 2, abfd, /*rela?*/ TRUE);
   1452   1.3  christos 
   1453   1.1     skrll 		  if (sreloc == NULL)
   1454   1.1     skrll 		    {
   1455   1.3  christos 		      bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   1456   1.3  christos 		      return FALSE;
   1457   1.1     skrll 		    }
   1458   1.1     skrll 		}
   1459   1.1     skrll 
   1460   1.1     skrll 	      /* If this is a global symbol, we count the number of
   1461   1.1     skrll 		 relocations we need for this symbol.  */
   1462   1.1     skrll 	      if (hh != NULL)
   1463   1.1     skrll 		{
   1464   1.1     skrll 		  hdh_head = &hh->dyn_relocs;
   1465   1.1     skrll 		}
   1466   1.1     skrll 	      else
   1467   1.1     skrll 		{
   1468   1.1     skrll 		  /* Track dynamic relocs needed for local syms too.
   1469   1.1     skrll 		     We really need local syms available to do this
   1470   1.1     skrll 		     easily.  Oh well.  */
   1471   1.1     skrll 		  asection *sr;
   1472   1.1     skrll 		  void *vpp;
   1473   1.3  christos 		  Elf_Internal_Sym *isym;
   1474   1.3  christos 
   1475   1.3  christos 		  isym = bfd_sym_from_r_symndx (&htab->sym_cache,
   1476   1.3  christos 						abfd, r_symndx);
   1477   1.3  christos 		  if (isym == NULL)
   1478   1.3  christos 		    return FALSE;
   1479   1.1     skrll 
   1480   1.3  christos 		  sr = bfd_section_from_elf_index (abfd, isym->st_shndx);
   1481   1.1     skrll 		  if (sr == NULL)
   1482   1.3  christos 		    sr = sec;
   1483   1.1     skrll 
   1484   1.1     skrll 		  vpp = &elf_section_data (sr)->local_dynrel;
   1485  1.11  christos 		  hdh_head = (struct elf_dyn_relocs **) vpp;
   1486   1.1     skrll 		}
   1487   1.1     skrll 
   1488   1.1     skrll 	      hdh_p = *hdh_head;
   1489   1.1     skrll 	      if (hdh_p == NULL || hdh_p->sec != sec)
   1490   1.1     skrll 		{
   1491   1.1     skrll 		  hdh_p = bfd_alloc (htab->etab.dynobj, sizeof *hdh_p);
   1492   1.1     skrll 		  if (hdh_p == NULL)
   1493   1.1     skrll 		    return FALSE;
   1494  1.11  christos 		  hdh_p->next = *hdh_head;
   1495   1.1     skrll 		  *hdh_head = hdh_p;
   1496   1.1     skrll 		  hdh_p->sec = sec;
   1497   1.1     skrll 		  hdh_p->count = 0;
   1498   1.1     skrll #if RELATIVE_DYNRELOCS
   1499  1.11  christos 		  hdh_p->pc_count = 0;
   1500   1.1     skrll #endif
   1501   1.1     skrll 		}
   1502   1.1     skrll 
   1503   1.1     skrll 	      hdh_p->count += 1;
   1504   1.1     skrll #if RELATIVE_DYNRELOCS
   1505   1.1     skrll 	      if (!IS_ABSOLUTE_RELOC (rtype))
   1506  1.11  christos 		hdh_p->pc_count += 1;
   1507   1.1     skrll #endif
   1508   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1509   1.1     skrll 	}
   1510   1.1     skrll     }
   1511   1.1     skrll 
   1512   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   1513   1.1     skrll }
   1514   1.1     skrll 
   1515   1.1     skrll /* Return the section that should be marked against garbage collection
   1516   1.1     skrll    for a given relocation.  */
   1517   1.1     skrll 
   1518   1.1     skrll static asection *
   1519   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_gc_mark_hook (asection *sec,
   1520   1.1     skrll 			 struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1521   1.1     skrll 			 Elf_Internal_Rela *rela,
   1522   1.1     skrll 			 struct elf_link_hash_entry *hh,
   1523   1.1     skrll 			 Elf_Internal_Sym *sym)
   1524   1.1     skrll {
   1525   1.1     skrll   if (hh != NULL)
   1526   1.1     skrll     switch ((unsigned int) ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info))
   1527   1.1     skrll       {
   1528   1.1     skrll       case R_PARISC_GNU_VTINHERIT:
   1529   1.1     skrll       case R_PARISC_GNU_VTENTRY:
   1530   1.1     skrll 	return NULL;
   1531   1.1     skrll       }
   1532   1.1     skrll 
   1533   1.1     skrll   return _bfd_elf_gc_mark_hook (sec, info, rela, hh, sym);
   1534   1.1     skrll }
   1535   1.1     skrll 
   1536   1.1     skrll /* Support for core dump NOTE sections.  */
   1537   1.1     skrll 
   1538   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1539   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_grok_prstatus (bfd *abfd, Elf_Internal_Note *note)
   1540   1.1     skrll {
   1541   1.1     skrll   int offset;
   1542   1.1     skrll   size_t size;
   1543   1.1     skrll 
   1544   1.1     skrll   switch (note->descsz)
   1545   1.1     skrll     {
   1546   1.1     skrll       default:
   1547   1.1     skrll 	return FALSE;
   1548   1.1     skrll 
   1549   1.1     skrll       case 396:		/* Linux/hppa */
   1550   1.1     skrll 	/* pr_cursig */
   1551   1.7  christos 	elf_tdata (abfd)->core->signal = bfd_get_16 (abfd, note->descdata + 12);
   1552   1.1     skrll 
   1553   1.1     skrll 	/* pr_pid */
   1554   1.7  christos 	elf_tdata (abfd)->core->lwpid = bfd_get_32 (abfd, note->descdata + 24);
   1555   1.1     skrll 
   1556   1.1     skrll 	/* pr_reg */
   1557   1.1     skrll 	offset = 72;
   1558   1.1     skrll 	size = 320;
   1559   1.1     skrll 
   1560   1.1     skrll 	break;
   1561   1.1     skrll     }
   1562   1.1     skrll 
   1563   1.1     skrll   /* Make a ".reg/999" section.  */
   1564   1.1     skrll   return _bfd_elfcore_make_pseudosection (abfd, ".reg",
   1565   1.1     skrll 					  size, note->descpos + offset);
   1566   1.1     skrll }
   1567   1.1     skrll 
   1568   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1569   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_grok_psinfo (bfd *abfd, Elf_Internal_Note *note)
   1570   1.1     skrll {
   1571   1.1     skrll   switch (note->descsz)
   1572   1.1     skrll     {
   1573   1.1     skrll       default:
   1574   1.1     skrll 	return FALSE;
   1575   1.1     skrll 
   1576   1.1     skrll       case 124:		/* Linux/hppa elf_prpsinfo.  */
   1577   1.7  christos 	elf_tdata (abfd)->core->program
   1578   1.1     skrll 	  = _bfd_elfcore_strndup (abfd, note->descdata + 28, 16);
   1579   1.7  christos 	elf_tdata (abfd)->core->command
   1580   1.1     skrll 	  = _bfd_elfcore_strndup (abfd, note->descdata + 44, 80);
   1581   1.1     skrll     }
   1582   1.1     skrll 
   1583   1.1     skrll   /* Note that for some reason, a spurious space is tacked
   1584   1.1     skrll      onto the end of the args in some (at least one anyway)
   1585   1.1     skrll      implementations, so strip it off if it exists.  */
   1586   1.1     skrll   {
   1587   1.7  christos     char *command = elf_tdata (abfd)->core->command;
   1588   1.1     skrll     int n = strlen (command);
   1589   1.1     skrll 
   1590   1.1     skrll     if (0 < n && command[n - 1] == ' ')
   1591   1.1     skrll       command[n - 1] = '\0';
   1592   1.1     skrll   }
   1593   1.1     skrll 
   1594   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   1595   1.1     skrll }
   1596   1.1     skrll 
   1597   1.1     skrll /* Our own version of hide_symbol, so that we can keep plt entries for
   1598   1.1     skrll    plabels.  */
   1599   1.1     skrll 
   1600   1.1     skrll static void
   1601   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_hide_symbol (struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1602   1.1     skrll 			struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh,
   1603   1.1     skrll 			bfd_boolean force_local)
   1604   1.1     skrll {
   1605   1.1     skrll   if (force_local)
   1606   1.1     skrll     {
   1607   1.1     skrll       eh->forced_local = 1;
   1608   1.1     skrll       if (eh->dynindx != -1)
   1609   1.1     skrll 	{
   1610   1.1     skrll 	  eh->dynindx = -1;
   1611   1.1     skrll 	  _bfd_elf_strtab_delref (elf_hash_table (info)->dynstr,
   1612   1.1     skrll 				  eh->dynstr_index);
   1613   1.1     skrll 	}
   1614   1.7  christos 
   1615   1.7  christos       /* PR 16082: Remove version information from hidden symbol.  */
   1616   1.7  christos       eh->verinfo.verdef = NULL;
   1617   1.7  christos       eh->verinfo.vertree = NULL;
   1618   1.1     skrll     }
   1619   1.1     skrll 
   1620   1.6  christos   /* STT_GNU_IFUNC symbol must go through PLT.  */
   1621   1.6  christos   if (! hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh)->plabel
   1622   1.6  christos       && eh->type != STT_GNU_IFUNC)
   1623   1.1     skrll     {
   1624   1.1     skrll       eh->needs_plt = 0;
   1625   1.6  christos       eh->plt = elf_hash_table (info)->init_plt_offset;
   1626   1.1     skrll     }
   1627   1.1     skrll }
   1628   1.1     skrll 
   1629  1.11  christos /* Find any dynamic relocs that apply to read-only sections.  */
   1630  1.11  christos 
   1631  1.11  christos static asection *
   1632  1.11  christos readonly_dynrelocs (struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh)
   1633  1.11  christos {
   1634  1.11  christos   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   1635  1.11  christos   struct elf_dyn_relocs *hdh_p;
   1636  1.11  christos 
   1637  1.11  christos   hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh);
   1638  1.11  christos   for (hdh_p = hh->dyn_relocs; hdh_p != NULL; hdh_p = hdh_p->next)
   1639  1.11  christos     {
   1640  1.11  christos       asection *sec = hdh_p->sec->output_section;
   1641  1.11  christos 
   1642  1.11  christos       if (sec != NULL && (sec->flags & SEC_READONLY) != 0)
   1643  1.11  christos 	return hdh_p->sec;
   1644  1.11  christos     }
   1645  1.11  christos   return NULL;
   1646  1.11  christos }
   1647  1.11  christos 
   1648  1.11  christos /* Return true if we have dynamic relocs against H or any of its weak
   1649  1.11  christos    aliases, that apply to read-only sections.  Cannot be used after
   1650  1.11  christos    size_dynamic_sections.  */
   1651  1.11  christos 
   1652  1.11  christos static bfd_boolean
   1653  1.11  christos alias_readonly_dynrelocs (struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh)
   1654  1.11  christos {
   1655  1.11  christos   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh);
   1656  1.11  christos   do
   1657  1.11  christos     {
   1658  1.11  christos       if (readonly_dynrelocs (&hh->eh))
   1659  1.11  christos 	return TRUE;
   1660  1.11  christos       hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (hh->eh.u.alias);
   1661  1.11  christos     } while (hh != NULL && &hh->eh != eh);
   1662  1.11  christos 
   1663  1.11  christos   return FALSE;
   1664  1.11  christos }
   1665  1.11  christos 
   1666   1.1     skrll /* Adjust a symbol defined by a dynamic object and referenced by a
   1667   1.1     skrll    regular object.  The current definition is in some section of the
   1668   1.1     skrll    dynamic object, but we're not including those sections.  We have to
   1669   1.1     skrll    change the definition to something the rest of the link can
   1670   1.1     skrll    understand.  */
   1671   1.1     skrll 
   1672   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1673   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_adjust_dynamic_symbol (struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1674   1.1     skrll 				  struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh)
   1675   1.1     skrll {
   1676   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   1677  1.11  christos   asection *sec, *srel;
   1678   1.1     skrll 
   1679   1.1     skrll   /* If this is a function, put it in the procedure linkage table.  We
   1680   1.1     skrll      will fill in the contents of the procedure linkage table later.  */
   1681   1.1     skrll   if (eh->type == STT_FUNC
   1682   1.1     skrll       || eh->needs_plt)
   1683   1.1     skrll     {
   1684  1.11  christos       bfd_boolean local = (SYMBOL_CALLS_LOCAL (info, eh)
   1685  1.11  christos 			   || UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, eh));
   1686  1.11  christos       /* Discard dyn_relocs when non-pic if we've decided that a
   1687  1.11  christos 	 function symbol is local.  */
   1688  1.11  christos       if (!bfd_link_pic (info) && local)
   1689  1.11  christos 	hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh)->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   1690  1.11  christos 
   1691   1.6  christos       /* If the symbol is used by a plabel, we must allocate a PLT slot.
   1692   1.6  christos 	 The refcounts are not reliable when it has been hidden since
   1693   1.6  christos 	 hide_symbol can be called before the plabel flag is set.  */
   1694  1.11  christos       if (hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh)->plabel)
   1695   1.6  christos 	eh->plt.refcount = 1;
   1696   1.6  christos 
   1697  1.11  christos       /* Note that unlike some other backends, the refcount is not
   1698  1.11  christos 	 incremented for a non-call (and non-plabel) function reference.  */
   1699  1.11  christos       else if (eh->plt.refcount <= 0
   1700  1.11  christos 	       || local)
   1701   1.1     skrll 	{
   1702   1.1     skrll 	  /* The .plt entry is not needed when:
   1703   1.1     skrll 	     a) Garbage collection has removed all references to the
   1704   1.1     skrll 	     symbol, or
   1705   1.1     skrll 	     b) We know for certain the symbol is defined in this
   1706   1.1     skrll 	     object, and it's not a weak definition, nor is the symbol
   1707   1.1     skrll 	     used by a plabel relocation.  Either this object is the
   1708   1.1     skrll 	     application or we are doing a shared symbolic link.  */
   1709   1.1     skrll 	  eh->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1710   1.1     skrll 	  eh->needs_plt = 0;
   1711   1.1     skrll 	}
   1712   1.1     skrll 
   1713  1.11  christos       /* Unlike other targets, elf32-hppa.c does not define a function
   1714  1.11  christos 	 symbol in a non-pic executable on PLT stub code, so we don't
   1715  1.11  christos 	 have a local definition in that case.  ie. dyn_relocs can't
   1716  1.11  christos 	 be discarded.  */
   1717  1.11  christos 
   1718  1.11  christos       /* Function symbols can't have copy relocs.  */
   1719   1.1     skrll       return TRUE;
   1720   1.1     skrll     }
   1721   1.1     skrll   else
   1722   1.1     skrll     eh->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1723   1.1     skrll 
   1724  1.11  christos   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   1725  1.11  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   1726  1.11  christos     return FALSE;
   1727  1.11  christos 
   1728   1.1     skrll   /* If this is a weak symbol, and there is a real definition, the
   1729   1.1     skrll      processor independent code will have arranged for us to see the
   1730   1.1     skrll      real definition first, and we can just use the same value.  */
   1731  1.11  christos   if (eh->is_weakalias)
   1732   1.1     skrll     {
   1733  1.11  christos       struct elf_link_hash_entry *def = weakdef (eh);
   1734  1.11  christos       BFD_ASSERT (def->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defined);
   1735  1.11  christos       eh->root.u.def.section = def->root.u.def.section;
   1736  1.11  christos       eh->root.u.def.value = def->root.u.def.value;
   1737  1.11  christos       if (def->root.u.def.section == htab->etab.sdynbss
   1738  1.11  christos 	  || def->root.u.def.section == htab->etab.sdynrelro)
   1739  1.11  christos 	hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh)->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   1740   1.1     skrll       return TRUE;
   1741   1.1     skrll     }
   1742   1.1     skrll 
   1743   1.1     skrll   /* This is a reference to a symbol defined by a dynamic object which
   1744   1.1     skrll      is not a function.  */
   1745   1.1     skrll 
   1746   1.1     skrll   /* If we are creating a shared library, we must presume that the
   1747   1.1     skrll      only references to the symbol are via the global offset table.
   1748   1.1     skrll      For such cases we need not do anything here; the relocations will
   1749   1.1     skrll      be handled correctly by relocate_section.  */
   1750   1.7  christos   if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   1751   1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   1752   1.1     skrll 
   1753   1.1     skrll   /* If there are no references to this symbol that do not use the
   1754   1.1     skrll      GOT, we don't need to generate a copy reloc.  */
   1755   1.1     skrll   if (!eh->non_got_ref)
   1756   1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   1757   1.1     skrll 
   1758  1.11  christos   /* If -z nocopyreloc was given, we won't generate them either.  */
   1759  1.11  christos   if (info->nocopyreloc)
   1760  1.11  christos     return TRUE;
   1761   1.1     skrll 
   1762  1.11  christos   /* If we don't find any dynamic relocs in read-only sections, then
   1763  1.11  christos      we'll be keeping the dynamic relocs and avoiding the copy reloc.  */
   1764  1.11  christos   if (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS
   1765  1.11  christos       && !alias_readonly_dynrelocs (eh))
   1766  1.11  christos     return TRUE;
   1767   1.1     skrll 
   1768   1.1     skrll   /* We must allocate the symbol in our .dynbss section, which will
   1769   1.1     skrll      become part of the .bss section of the executable.  There will be
   1770   1.1     skrll      an entry for this symbol in the .dynsym section.  The dynamic
   1771   1.1     skrll      object will contain position independent code, so all references
   1772   1.1     skrll      from the dynamic object to this symbol will go through the global
   1773   1.1     skrll      offset table.  The dynamic linker will use the .dynsym entry to
   1774   1.1     skrll      determine the address it must put in the global offset table, so
   1775   1.1     skrll      both the dynamic object and the regular object will refer to the
   1776   1.1     skrll      same memory location for the variable.  */
   1777  1.11  christos   if ((eh->root.u.def.section->flags & SEC_READONLY) != 0)
   1778  1.11  christos     {
   1779  1.11  christos       sec = htab->etab.sdynrelro;
   1780  1.11  christos       srel = htab->etab.sreldynrelro;
   1781  1.11  christos     }
   1782  1.11  christos   else
   1783  1.11  christos     {
   1784  1.11  christos       sec = htab->etab.sdynbss;
   1785  1.11  christos       srel = htab->etab.srelbss;
   1786  1.11  christos     }
   1787   1.6  christos   if ((eh->root.u.def.section->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0 && eh->size != 0)
   1788   1.1     skrll     {
   1789  1.11  christos       /* We must generate a COPY reloc to tell the dynamic linker to
   1790  1.11  christos 	 copy the initial value out of the dynamic object and into the
   1791  1.11  christos 	 runtime process image.  */
   1792  1.11  christos       srel->size += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   1793   1.1     skrll       eh->needs_copy = 1;
   1794   1.1     skrll     }
   1795   1.1     skrll 
   1796  1.11  christos   /* We no longer want dyn_relocs.  */
   1797  1.11  christos   hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh)->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   1798  1.11  christos   return _bfd_elf_adjust_dynamic_copy (info, eh, sec);
   1799  1.11  christos }
   1800  1.11  christos 
   1801  1.11  christos /* If EH is undefined, make it dynamic if that makes sense.  */
   1802  1.11  christos 
   1803  1.11  christos static bfd_boolean
   1804  1.11  christos ensure_undef_dynamic (struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1805  1.11  christos 		      struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh)
   1806  1.11  christos {
   1807  1.11  christos   struct elf_link_hash_table *htab = elf_hash_table (info);
   1808   1.1     skrll 
   1809  1.11  christos   if (htab->dynamic_sections_created
   1810  1.11  christos       && (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak
   1811  1.11  christos 	  || eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefined)
   1812  1.11  christos       && eh->dynindx == -1
   1813  1.11  christos       && !eh->forced_local
   1814  1.11  christos       && eh->type != STT_PARISC_MILLI
   1815  1.11  christos       && !UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, eh)
   1816  1.11  christos       && ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (eh->other) == STV_DEFAULT)
   1817  1.11  christos     return bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, eh);
   1818  1.11  christos   return TRUE;
   1819   1.1     skrll }
   1820   1.1     skrll 
   1821   1.1     skrll /* Allocate space in the .plt for entries that won't have relocations.
   1822   1.1     skrll    ie. plabel entries.  */
   1823   1.1     skrll 
   1824   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1825   1.1     skrll allocate_plt_static (struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh, void *inf)
   1826   1.1     skrll {
   1827   1.1     skrll   struct bfd_link_info *info;
   1828   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   1829   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   1830   1.1     skrll   asection *sec;
   1831   1.1     skrll 
   1832   1.1     skrll   if (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect)
   1833   1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   1834   1.1     skrll 
   1835   1.1     skrll   info = (struct bfd_link_info *) inf;
   1836   1.1     skrll   hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh);
   1837   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   1838   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   1839   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   1840   1.3  christos 
   1841   1.1     skrll   if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created
   1842   1.1     skrll       && eh->plt.refcount > 0)
   1843   1.1     skrll     {
   1844  1.11  christos       if (!ensure_undef_dynamic (info, eh))
   1845  1.11  christos 	return FALSE;
   1846   1.1     skrll 
   1847   1.7  christos       if (WILL_CALL_FINISH_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL (1, bfd_link_pic (info), eh))
   1848   1.1     skrll 	{
   1849   1.1     skrll 	  /* Allocate these later.  From this point on, h->plabel
   1850   1.1     skrll 	     means that the plt entry is only used by a plabel.
   1851   1.1     skrll 	     We'll be using a normal plt entry for this symbol, so
   1852   1.1     skrll 	     clear the plabel indicator.  */
   1853   1.7  christos 
   1854   1.1     skrll 	  hh->plabel = 0;
   1855   1.1     skrll 	}
   1856   1.1     skrll       else if (hh->plabel)
   1857   1.1     skrll 	{
   1858   1.1     skrll 	  /* Make an entry in the .plt section for plabel references
   1859   1.1     skrll 	     that won't have a .plt entry for other reasons.  */
   1860  1.11  christos 	  sec = htab->etab.splt;
   1861   1.1     skrll 	  eh->plt.offset = sec->size;
   1862   1.1     skrll 	  sec->size += PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1863  1.11  christos 	  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   1864  1.11  christos 	    htab->etab.srelplt->size += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   1865   1.1     skrll 	}
   1866   1.1     skrll       else
   1867   1.1     skrll 	{
   1868   1.1     skrll 	  /* No .plt entry needed.  */
   1869   1.1     skrll 	  eh->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1870   1.1     skrll 	  eh->needs_plt = 0;
   1871   1.1     skrll 	}
   1872   1.1     skrll     }
   1873   1.1     skrll   else
   1874   1.1     skrll     {
   1875   1.1     skrll       eh->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1876   1.1     skrll       eh->needs_plt = 0;
   1877   1.1     skrll     }
   1878   1.1     skrll 
   1879   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   1880   1.1     skrll }
   1881   1.1     skrll 
   1882  1.11  christos /* Calculate size of GOT entries for symbol given its TLS_TYPE.  */
   1883  1.11  christos 
   1884  1.11  christos static inline unsigned int
   1885  1.11  christos got_entries_needed (int tls_type)
   1886  1.11  christos {
   1887  1.11  christos   unsigned int need = 0;
   1888  1.11  christos 
   1889  1.11  christos   if ((tls_type & GOT_NORMAL) != 0)
   1890  1.11  christos     need += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1891  1.11  christos   if ((tls_type & GOT_TLS_GD) != 0)
   1892  1.11  christos     need += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE * 2;
   1893  1.11  christos   if ((tls_type & GOT_TLS_IE) != 0)
   1894  1.11  christos     need += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1895  1.11  christos   return need;
   1896  1.11  christos }
   1897  1.11  christos 
   1898  1.11  christos /* Calculate size of relocs needed for symbol given its TLS_TYPE and
   1899  1.12  christos    NEEDed GOT entries.  TPREL_KNOWN says a TPREL offset can be
   1900  1.12  christos    calculated at link time.  DTPREL_KNOWN says the same for a DTPREL
   1901  1.12  christos    offset.  */
   1902  1.11  christos 
   1903  1.11  christos static inline unsigned int
   1904  1.12  christos got_relocs_needed (int tls_type, unsigned int need,
   1905  1.12  christos 		   bfd_boolean dtprel_known, bfd_boolean tprel_known)
   1906  1.11  christos {
   1907  1.11  christos   /* All the entries we allocated need relocs.
   1908  1.12  christos      Except for GD and IE with local symbols.  */
   1909  1.12  christos   if ((tls_type & GOT_TLS_GD) != 0 && dtprel_known)
   1910  1.12  christos     need -= GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1911  1.12  christos   if ((tls_type & GOT_TLS_IE) != 0 && tprel_known)
   1912  1.11  christos     need -= GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1913  1.11  christos   return need * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela) / GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1914  1.11  christos }
   1915  1.11  christos 
   1916   1.1     skrll /* Allocate space in .plt, .got and associated reloc sections for
   1917   1.1     skrll    global syms.  */
   1918   1.1     skrll 
   1919   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1920   1.1     skrll allocate_dynrelocs (struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh, void *inf)
   1921   1.1     skrll {
   1922   1.1     skrll   struct bfd_link_info *info;
   1923   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   1924   1.1     skrll   asection *sec;
   1925   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   1926  1.11  christos   struct elf_dyn_relocs *hdh_p;
   1927   1.1     skrll 
   1928   1.1     skrll   if (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect)
   1929   1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   1930   1.1     skrll 
   1931   1.1     skrll   info = inf;
   1932   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   1933   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   1934   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   1935   1.3  christos 
   1936   1.1     skrll   hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh);
   1937   1.7  christos 
   1938   1.1     skrll   if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created
   1939   1.1     skrll       && eh->plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1
   1940   1.1     skrll       && !hh->plabel
   1941   1.1     skrll       && eh->plt.refcount > 0)
   1942   1.1     skrll     {
   1943   1.1     skrll       /* Make an entry in the .plt section.  */
   1944  1.11  christos       sec = htab->etab.splt;
   1945   1.1     skrll       eh->plt.offset = sec->size;
   1946   1.1     skrll       sec->size += PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1947   1.1     skrll 
   1948   1.1     skrll       /* We also need to make an entry in the .rela.plt section.  */
   1949  1.11  christos       htab->etab.srelplt->size += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   1950   1.1     skrll       htab->need_plt_stub = 1;
   1951   1.1     skrll     }
   1952   1.1     skrll 
   1953   1.1     skrll   if (eh->got.refcount > 0)
   1954   1.1     skrll     {
   1955  1.11  christos       unsigned int need;
   1956  1.11  christos 
   1957  1.11  christos       if (!ensure_undef_dynamic (info, eh))
   1958  1.11  christos 	return FALSE;
   1959   1.1     skrll 
   1960  1.11  christos       sec = htab->etab.sgot;
   1961   1.1     skrll       eh->got.offset = sec->size;
   1962  1.11  christos       need = got_entries_needed (hh->tls_type);
   1963  1.11  christos       sec->size += need;
   1964   1.1     skrll       if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created
   1965  1.12  christos 	  && (bfd_link_dll (info)
   1966  1.12  christos 	      || (bfd_link_pic (info) && (hh->tls_type & GOT_NORMAL) != 0)
   1967   1.1     skrll 	      || (eh->dynindx != -1
   1968  1.11  christos 		  && !SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, eh)))
   1969  1.11  christos 	  && !UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, eh))
   1970   1.1     skrll 	{
   1971  1.12  christos 	  bfd_boolean local = SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, eh);
   1972  1.11  christos 	  htab->etab.srelgot->size
   1973  1.12  christos 	    += got_relocs_needed (hh->tls_type, need, local,
   1974  1.12  christos 				  local && bfd_link_executable (info));
   1975   1.1     skrll 	}
   1976   1.1     skrll     }
   1977   1.1     skrll   else
   1978   1.1     skrll     eh->got.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1979   1.1     skrll 
   1980  1.11  christos   /* If no dynamic sections we can't have dynamic relocs.  */
   1981  1.11  christos   if (!htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created)
   1982  1.11  christos     hh->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   1983  1.11  christos 
   1984  1.11  christos   /* Discard relocs on undefined syms with non-default visibility.  */
   1985  1.11  christos   else if ((eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefined
   1986  1.11  christos 	    && ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (eh->other) != STV_DEFAULT)
   1987  1.11  christos 	   || UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, eh))
   1988  1.11  christos     hh->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   1989  1.11  christos 
   1990   1.1     skrll   if (hh->dyn_relocs == NULL)
   1991   1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   1992   1.1     skrll 
   1993   1.1     skrll   /* If this is a -Bsymbolic shared link, then we need to discard all
   1994   1.1     skrll      space allocated for dynamic pc-relative relocs against symbols
   1995   1.1     skrll      defined in a regular object.  For the normal shared case, discard
   1996   1.1     skrll      space for relocs that have become local due to symbol visibility
   1997   1.1     skrll      changes.  */
   1998   1.7  christos   if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   1999   1.1     skrll     {
   2000   1.1     skrll #if RELATIVE_DYNRELOCS
   2001   1.1     skrll       if (SYMBOL_CALLS_LOCAL (info, eh))
   2002   1.1     skrll 	{
   2003  1.11  christos 	  struct elf_dyn_relocs **hdh_pp;
   2004   1.1     skrll 
   2005   1.1     skrll 	  for (hdh_pp = &hh->dyn_relocs; (hdh_p = *hdh_pp) != NULL; )
   2006   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2007  1.11  christos 	      hdh_p->count -= hdh_p->pc_count;
   2008  1.11  christos 	      hdh_p->pc_count = 0;
   2009   1.1     skrll 	      if (hdh_p->count == 0)
   2010  1.11  christos 		*hdh_pp = hdh_p->next;
   2011   1.1     skrll 	      else
   2012  1.11  christos 		hdh_pp = &hdh_p->next;
   2013   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2014   1.1     skrll 	}
   2015   1.1     skrll #endif
   2016   1.1     skrll 
   2017  1.11  christos       if (hh->dyn_relocs != NULL)
   2018   1.1     skrll 	{
   2019  1.11  christos 	  if (!ensure_undef_dynamic (info, eh))
   2020  1.11  christos 	    return FALSE;
   2021   1.1     skrll 	}
   2022   1.1     skrll     }
   2023  1.11  christos   else if (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS)
   2024   1.1     skrll     {
   2025   1.1     skrll       /* For the non-shared case, discard space for relocs against
   2026   1.1     skrll 	 symbols which turn out to need copy relocs or are not
   2027   1.1     skrll 	 dynamic.  */
   2028   1.7  christos 
   2029  1.11  christos       if (eh->dynamic_adjusted
   2030  1.11  christos 	  && !eh->def_regular
   2031  1.11  christos 	  && !ELF_COMMON_DEF_P (eh))
   2032  1.11  christos 	{
   2033  1.11  christos 	  if (!ensure_undef_dynamic (info, eh))
   2034  1.11  christos 	    return FALSE;
   2035   1.1     skrll 
   2036  1.11  christos 	  if (eh->dynindx == -1)
   2037  1.11  christos 	    hh->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   2038   1.1     skrll 	}
   2039  1.11  christos       else
   2040  1.11  christos 	hh->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   2041   1.1     skrll     }
   2042   1.1     skrll 
   2043   1.1     skrll   /* Finally, allocate space.  */
   2044  1.11  christos   for (hdh_p = hh->dyn_relocs; hdh_p != NULL; hdh_p = hdh_p->next)
   2045   1.1     skrll     {
   2046   1.1     skrll       asection *sreloc = elf_section_data (hdh_p->sec)->sreloc;
   2047   1.1     skrll       sreloc->size += hdh_p->count * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2048   1.1     skrll     }
   2049   1.1     skrll 
   2050   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   2051   1.1     skrll }
   2052   1.1     skrll 
   2053   1.1     skrll /* This function is called via elf_link_hash_traverse to force
   2054   1.1     skrll    millicode symbols local so they do not end up as globals in the
   2055   1.1     skrll    dynamic symbol table.  We ought to be able to do this in
   2056   1.1     skrll    adjust_dynamic_symbol, but our adjust_dynamic_symbol is not called
   2057   1.1     skrll    for all dynamic symbols.  Arguably, this is a bug in
   2058   1.1     skrll    elf_adjust_dynamic_symbol.  */
   2059   1.1     skrll 
   2060   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   2061   1.1     skrll clobber_millicode_symbols (struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh,
   2062   1.1     skrll 			   struct bfd_link_info *info)
   2063   1.1     skrll {
   2064   1.1     skrll   if (eh->type == STT_PARISC_MILLI
   2065   1.1     skrll       && !eh->forced_local)
   2066   1.1     skrll     {
   2067   1.1     skrll       elf32_hppa_hide_symbol (info, eh, TRUE);
   2068   1.1     skrll     }
   2069   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   2070   1.1     skrll }
   2071   1.1     skrll 
   2072  1.11  christos /* Set DF_TEXTREL if we find any dynamic relocs that apply to
   2073  1.11  christos    read-only sections.  */
   2074   1.1     skrll 
   2075   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   2076  1.11  christos maybe_set_textrel (struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh, void *inf)
   2077   1.1     skrll {
   2078  1.11  christos   asection *sec;
   2079  1.11  christos 
   2080  1.11  christos   if (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect)
   2081  1.11  christos     return TRUE;
   2082   1.1     skrll 
   2083  1.11  christos   sec = readonly_dynrelocs (eh);
   2084  1.11  christos   if (sec != NULL)
   2085   1.1     skrll     {
   2086  1.11  christos       struct bfd_link_info *info = (struct bfd_link_info *) inf;
   2087   1.1     skrll 
   2088  1.11  christos       info->flags |= DF_TEXTREL;
   2089  1.11  christos       info->callbacks->minfo
   2090  1.12  christos 	(_("%pB: dynamic relocation against `%pT' in read-only section `%pA'\n"),
   2091  1.11  christos 	 sec->owner, eh->root.root.string, sec);
   2092  1.11  christos       /* Not an error, just cut short the traversal.  */
   2093  1.11  christos       return FALSE;
   2094   1.1     skrll     }
   2095   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   2096   1.1     skrll }
   2097   1.1     skrll 
   2098   1.1     skrll /* Set the sizes of the dynamic sections.  */
   2099   1.1     skrll 
   2100   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   2101   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_size_dynamic_sections (bfd *output_bfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
   2102   1.1     skrll 				  struct bfd_link_info *info)
   2103   1.1     skrll {
   2104   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   2105   1.1     skrll   bfd *dynobj;
   2106   1.1     skrll   bfd *ibfd;
   2107   1.1     skrll   asection *sec;
   2108   1.1     skrll   bfd_boolean relocs;
   2109   1.1     skrll 
   2110   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   2111   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   2112   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   2113   1.3  christos 
   2114   1.1     skrll   dynobj = htab->etab.dynobj;
   2115   1.1     skrll   if (dynobj == NULL)
   2116   1.1     skrll     abort ();
   2117   1.1     skrll 
   2118   1.1     skrll   if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created)
   2119   1.1     skrll     {
   2120   1.1     skrll       /* Set the contents of the .interp section to the interpreter.  */
   2121   1.7  christos       if (bfd_link_executable (info) && !info->nointerp)
   2122   1.1     skrll 	{
   2123   1.6  christos 	  sec = bfd_get_linker_section (dynobj, ".interp");
   2124   1.1     skrll 	  if (sec == NULL)
   2125   1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   2126   1.1     skrll 	  sec->size = sizeof ELF_DYNAMIC_INTERPRETER;
   2127   1.1     skrll 	  sec->contents = (unsigned char *) ELF_DYNAMIC_INTERPRETER;
   2128   1.1     skrll 	}
   2129   1.1     skrll 
   2130   1.1     skrll       /* Force millicode symbols local.  */
   2131   1.1     skrll       elf_link_hash_traverse (&htab->etab,
   2132   1.1     skrll 			      clobber_millicode_symbols,
   2133   1.1     skrll 			      info);
   2134   1.1     skrll     }
   2135   1.1     skrll 
   2136   1.1     skrll   /* Set up .got and .plt offsets for local syms, and space for local
   2137   1.1     skrll      dynamic relocs.  */
   2138   1.7  christos   for (ibfd = info->input_bfds; ibfd != NULL; ibfd = ibfd->link.next)
   2139   1.1     skrll     {
   2140   1.1     skrll       bfd_signed_vma *local_got;
   2141   1.1     skrll       bfd_signed_vma *end_local_got;
   2142   1.1     skrll       bfd_signed_vma *local_plt;
   2143   1.1     skrll       bfd_signed_vma *end_local_plt;
   2144   1.1     skrll       bfd_size_type locsymcount;
   2145   1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   2146   1.1     skrll       asection *srel;
   2147   1.1     skrll       char *local_tls_type;
   2148   1.1     skrll 
   2149   1.1     skrll       if (bfd_get_flavour (ibfd) != bfd_target_elf_flavour)
   2150   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2151   1.1     skrll 
   2152   1.1     skrll       for (sec = ibfd->sections; sec != NULL; sec = sec->next)
   2153   1.1     skrll 	{
   2154  1.11  christos 	  struct elf_dyn_relocs *hdh_p;
   2155   1.1     skrll 
   2156  1.11  christos 	  for (hdh_p = ((struct elf_dyn_relocs *)
   2157   1.1     skrll 		    elf_section_data (sec)->local_dynrel);
   2158   1.1     skrll 	       hdh_p != NULL;
   2159  1.11  christos 	       hdh_p = hdh_p->next)
   2160   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2161   1.1     skrll 	      if (!bfd_is_abs_section (hdh_p->sec)
   2162   1.1     skrll 		  && bfd_is_abs_section (hdh_p->sec->output_section))
   2163   1.1     skrll 		{
   2164   1.1     skrll 		  /* Input section has been discarded, either because
   2165   1.1     skrll 		     it is a copy of a linkonce section or due to
   2166   1.1     skrll 		     linker script /DISCARD/, so we'll be discarding
   2167   1.1     skrll 		     the relocs too.  */
   2168   1.1     skrll 		}
   2169   1.1     skrll 	      else if (hdh_p->count != 0)
   2170   1.1     skrll 		{
   2171   1.1     skrll 		  srel = elf_section_data (hdh_p->sec)->sreloc;
   2172   1.1     skrll 		  srel->size += hdh_p->count * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2173   1.1     skrll 		  if ((hdh_p->sec->output_section->flags & SEC_READONLY) != 0)
   2174   1.1     skrll 		    info->flags |= DF_TEXTREL;
   2175   1.1     skrll 		}
   2176   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2177   1.1     skrll 	}
   2178   1.1     skrll 
   2179   1.1     skrll       local_got = elf_local_got_refcounts (ibfd);
   2180   1.1     skrll       if (!local_got)
   2181   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2182   1.1     skrll 
   2183   1.1     skrll       symtab_hdr = &elf_tdata (ibfd)->symtab_hdr;
   2184   1.1     skrll       locsymcount = symtab_hdr->sh_info;
   2185   1.1     skrll       end_local_got = local_got + locsymcount;
   2186   1.1     skrll       local_tls_type = hppa_elf_local_got_tls_type (ibfd);
   2187  1.11  christos       sec = htab->etab.sgot;
   2188  1.11  christos       srel = htab->etab.srelgot;
   2189   1.1     skrll       for (; local_got < end_local_got; ++local_got)
   2190   1.1     skrll 	{
   2191   1.1     skrll 	  if (*local_got > 0)
   2192   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2193  1.11  christos 	      unsigned int need;
   2194  1.11  christos 
   2195   1.1     skrll 	      *local_got = sec->size;
   2196  1.11  christos 	      need = got_entries_needed (*local_tls_type);
   2197  1.11  christos 	      sec->size += need;
   2198  1.12  christos 	      if (bfd_link_dll (info)
   2199  1.12  christos 		  || (bfd_link_pic (info)
   2200  1.12  christos 		      && (*local_tls_type & GOT_NORMAL) != 0))
   2201  1.12  christos 		htab->etab.srelgot->size
   2202  1.12  christos 		  += got_relocs_needed (*local_tls_type, need, TRUE,
   2203  1.12  christos 					bfd_link_executable (info));
   2204   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2205   1.1     skrll 	  else
   2206   1.1     skrll 	    *local_got = (bfd_vma) -1;
   2207   1.1     skrll 
   2208   1.1     skrll 	  ++local_tls_type;
   2209   1.1     skrll 	}
   2210   1.1     skrll 
   2211   1.1     skrll       local_plt = end_local_got;
   2212   1.1     skrll       end_local_plt = local_plt + locsymcount;
   2213   1.1     skrll       if (! htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created)
   2214   1.1     skrll 	{
   2215   1.1     skrll 	  /* Won't be used, but be safe.  */
   2216   1.1     skrll 	  for (; local_plt < end_local_plt; ++local_plt)
   2217   1.1     skrll 	    *local_plt = (bfd_vma) -1;
   2218   1.1     skrll 	}
   2219   1.1     skrll       else
   2220   1.1     skrll 	{
   2221  1.11  christos 	  sec = htab->etab.splt;
   2222  1.11  christos 	  srel = htab->etab.srelplt;
   2223   1.1     skrll 	  for (; local_plt < end_local_plt; ++local_plt)
   2224   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2225   1.1     skrll 	      if (*local_plt > 0)
   2226   1.1     skrll 		{
   2227   1.1     skrll 		  *local_plt = sec->size;
   2228   1.1     skrll 		  sec->size += PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2229   1.7  christos 		  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   2230   1.1     skrll 		    srel->size += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2231   1.1     skrll 		}
   2232   1.1     skrll 	      else
   2233   1.1     skrll 		*local_plt = (bfd_vma) -1;
   2234   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2235   1.1     skrll 	}
   2236   1.1     skrll     }
   2237   1.7  christos 
   2238   1.1     skrll   if (htab->tls_ldm_got.refcount > 0)
   2239   1.1     skrll     {
   2240   1.7  christos       /* Allocate 2 got entries and 1 dynamic reloc for
   2241  1.11  christos 	 R_PARISC_TLS_DTPMOD32 relocs.  */
   2242  1.11  christos       htab->tls_ldm_got.offset = htab->etab.sgot->size;
   2243  1.11  christos       htab->etab.sgot->size += (GOT_ENTRY_SIZE * 2);
   2244  1.11  christos       htab->etab.srelgot->size += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2245   1.1     skrll     }
   2246   1.1     skrll   else
   2247   1.1     skrll     htab->tls_ldm_got.offset = -1;
   2248   1.1     skrll 
   2249   1.1     skrll   /* Do all the .plt entries without relocs first.  The dynamic linker
   2250   1.1     skrll      uses the last .plt reloc to find the end of the .plt (and hence
   2251   1.1     skrll      the start of the .got) for lazy linking.  */
   2252   1.1     skrll   elf_link_hash_traverse (&htab->etab, allocate_plt_static, info);
   2253   1.1     skrll 
   2254   1.1     skrll   /* Allocate global sym .plt and .got entries, and space for global
   2255   1.1     skrll      sym dynamic relocs.  */
   2256   1.1     skrll   elf_link_hash_traverse (&htab->etab, allocate_dynrelocs, info);
   2257   1.1     skrll 
   2258   1.1     skrll   /* The check_relocs and adjust_dynamic_symbol entry points have
   2259   1.1     skrll      determined the sizes of the various dynamic sections.  Allocate
   2260   1.1     skrll      memory for them.  */
   2261   1.1     skrll   relocs = FALSE;
   2262   1.1     skrll   for (sec = dynobj->sections; sec != NULL; sec = sec->next)
   2263   1.1     skrll     {
   2264   1.1     skrll       if ((sec->flags & SEC_LINKER_CREATED) == 0)
   2265   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2266   1.1     skrll 
   2267  1.11  christos       if (sec == htab->etab.splt)
   2268   1.1     skrll 	{
   2269   1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->need_plt_stub)
   2270   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2271   1.1     skrll 	      /* Make space for the plt stub at the end of the .plt
   2272   1.1     skrll 		 section.  We want this stub right at the end, up
   2273   1.1     skrll 		 against the .got section.  */
   2274  1.11  christos 	      int gotalign = bfd_section_alignment (dynobj, htab->etab.sgot);
   2275   1.1     skrll 	      int pltalign = bfd_section_alignment (dynobj, sec);
   2276   1.1     skrll 	      bfd_size_type mask;
   2277   1.1     skrll 
   2278   1.1     skrll 	      if (gotalign > pltalign)
   2279   1.7  christos 		(void) bfd_set_section_alignment (dynobj, sec, gotalign);
   2280   1.1     skrll 	      mask = ((bfd_size_type) 1 << gotalign) - 1;
   2281   1.1     skrll 	      sec->size = (sec->size + sizeof (plt_stub) + mask) & ~mask;
   2282   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2283   1.1     skrll 	}
   2284  1.11  christos       else if (sec == htab->etab.sgot
   2285  1.11  christos 	       || sec == htab->etab.sdynbss
   2286  1.11  christos 	       || sec == htab->etab.sdynrelro)
   2287   1.1     skrll 	;
   2288   1.1     skrll       else if (CONST_STRNEQ (bfd_get_section_name (dynobj, sec), ".rela"))
   2289   1.1     skrll 	{
   2290   1.1     skrll 	  if (sec->size != 0)
   2291   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2292   1.1     skrll 	      /* Remember whether there are any reloc sections other
   2293   1.1     skrll 		 than .rela.plt.  */
   2294  1.11  christos 	      if (sec != htab->etab.srelplt)
   2295   1.1     skrll 		relocs = TRUE;
   2296   1.1     skrll 
   2297   1.1     skrll 	      /* We use the reloc_count field as a counter if we need
   2298   1.1     skrll 		 to copy relocs into the output file.  */
   2299   1.1     skrll 	      sec->reloc_count = 0;
   2300   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2301   1.1     skrll 	}
   2302   1.1     skrll       else
   2303   1.1     skrll 	{
   2304   1.1     skrll 	  /* It's not one of our sections, so don't allocate space.  */
   2305   1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   2306   1.1     skrll 	}
   2307   1.1     skrll 
   2308   1.1     skrll       if (sec->size == 0)
   2309   1.1     skrll 	{
   2310   1.1     skrll 	  /* If we don't need this section, strip it from the
   2311   1.1     skrll 	     output file.  This is mostly to handle .rela.bss and
   2312   1.1     skrll 	     .rela.plt.  We must create both sections in
   2313   1.1     skrll 	     create_dynamic_sections, because they must be created
   2314   1.1     skrll 	     before the linker maps input sections to output
   2315   1.1     skrll 	     sections.  The linker does that before
   2316   1.1     skrll 	     adjust_dynamic_symbol is called, and it is that
   2317   1.1     skrll 	     function which decides whether anything needs to go
   2318   1.1     skrll 	     into these sections.  */
   2319   1.1     skrll 	  sec->flags |= SEC_EXCLUDE;
   2320   1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   2321   1.1     skrll 	}
   2322   1.1     skrll 
   2323   1.1     skrll       if ((sec->flags & SEC_HAS_CONTENTS) == 0)
   2324   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2325   1.1     skrll 
   2326   1.1     skrll       /* Allocate memory for the section contents.  Zero it, because
   2327   1.1     skrll 	 we may not fill in all the reloc sections.  */
   2328   1.1     skrll       sec->contents = bfd_zalloc (dynobj, sec->size);
   2329   1.1     skrll       if (sec->contents == NULL)
   2330   1.1     skrll 	return FALSE;
   2331   1.1     skrll     }
   2332   1.1     skrll 
   2333   1.1     skrll   if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created)
   2334   1.1     skrll     {
   2335   1.1     skrll       /* Like IA-64 and HPPA64, always create a DT_PLTGOT.  It
   2336   1.1     skrll 	 actually has nothing to do with the PLT, it is how we
   2337   1.1     skrll 	 communicate the LTP value of a load module to the dynamic
   2338   1.1     skrll 	 linker.  */
   2339   1.1     skrll #define add_dynamic_entry(TAG, VAL) \
   2340   1.1     skrll   _bfd_elf_add_dynamic_entry (info, TAG, VAL)
   2341   1.1     skrll 
   2342   1.1     skrll       if (!add_dynamic_entry (DT_PLTGOT, 0))
   2343   1.1     skrll 	return FALSE;
   2344   1.1     skrll 
   2345   1.1     skrll       /* Add some entries to the .dynamic section.  We fill in the
   2346   1.1     skrll 	 values later, in elf32_hppa_finish_dynamic_sections, but we
   2347   1.1     skrll 	 must add the entries now so that we get the correct size for
   2348   1.1     skrll 	 the .dynamic section.  The DT_DEBUG entry is filled in by the
   2349   1.1     skrll 	 dynamic linker and used by the debugger.  */
   2350   1.7  christos       if (bfd_link_executable (info))
   2351   1.1     skrll 	{
   2352   1.1     skrll 	  if (!add_dynamic_entry (DT_DEBUG, 0))
   2353   1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   2354   1.1     skrll 	}
   2355   1.1     skrll 
   2356  1.11  christos       if (htab->etab.srelplt->size != 0)
   2357   1.1     skrll 	{
   2358   1.1     skrll 	  if (!add_dynamic_entry (DT_PLTRELSZ, 0)
   2359   1.1     skrll 	      || !add_dynamic_entry (DT_PLTREL, DT_RELA)
   2360   1.1     skrll 	      || !add_dynamic_entry (DT_JMPREL, 0))
   2361   1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   2362   1.1     skrll 	}
   2363   1.1     skrll 
   2364   1.1     skrll       if (relocs)
   2365   1.1     skrll 	{
   2366   1.1     skrll 	  if (!add_dynamic_entry (DT_RELA, 0)
   2367   1.1     skrll 	      || !add_dynamic_entry (DT_RELASZ, 0)
   2368   1.1     skrll 	      || !add_dynamic_entry (DT_RELAENT, sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela)))
   2369   1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   2370   1.1     skrll 
   2371   1.1     skrll 	  /* If any dynamic relocs apply to a read-only section,
   2372   1.1     skrll 	     then we need a DT_TEXTREL entry.  */
   2373   1.1     skrll 	  if ((info->flags & DF_TEXTREL) == 0)
   2374  1.11  christos 	    elf_link_hash_traverse (&htab->etab, maybe_set_textrel, info);
   2375   1.1     skrll 
   2376   1.1     skrll 	  if ((info->flags & DF_TEXTREL) != 0)
   2377   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2378   1.1     skrll 	      if (!add_dynamic_entry (DT_TEXTREL, 0))
   2379   1.1     skrll 		return FALSE;
   2380   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2381   1.1     skrll 	}
   2382   1.1     skrll     }
   2383   1.1     skrll #undef add_dynamic_entry
   2384   1.1     skrll 
   2385   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   2386   1.1     skrll }
   2387   1.1     skrll 
   2388   1.1     skrll /* External entry points for sizing and building linker stubs.  */
   2389   1.1     skrll 
   2390   1.1     skrll /* Set up various things so that we can make a list of input sections
   2391   1.1     skrll    for each output section included in the link.  Returns -1 on error,
   2392   1.1     skrll    0 when no stubs will be needed, and 1 on success.  */
   2393   1.1     skrll 
   2394   1.1     skrll int
   2395   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_setup_section_lists (bfd *output_bfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
   2396   1.1     skrll {
   2397   1.1     skrll   bfd *input_bfd;
   2398   1.1     skrll   unsigned int bfd_count;
   2399   1.7  christos   unsigned int top_id, top_index;
   2400   1.1     skrll   asection *section;
   2401   1.1     skrll   asection **input_list, **list;
   2402   1.1     skrll   bfd_size_type amt;
   2403   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   2404   1.1     skrll 
   2405   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   2406   1.3  christos     return -1;
   2407   1.3  christos 
   2408   1.1     skrll   /* Count the number of input BFDs and find the top input section id.  */
   2409   1.1     skrll   for (input_bfd = info->input_bfds, bfd_count = 0, top_id = 0;
   2410   1.1     skrll        input_bfd != NULL;
   2411   1.7  christos        input_bfd = input_bfd->link.next)
   2412   1.1     skrll     {
   2413   1.1     skrll       bfd_count += 1;
   2414   1.1     skrll       for (section = input_bfd->sections;
   2415   1.1     skrll 	   section != NULL;
   2416   1.1     skrll 	   section = section->next)
   2417   1.1     skrll 	{
   2418   1.1     skrll 	  if (top_id < section->id)
   2419   1.1     skrll 	    top_id = section->id;
   2420   1.1     skrll 	}
   2421   1.1     skrll     }
   2422   1.1     skrll   htab->bfd_count = bfd_count;
   2423   1.1     skrll 
   2424   1.1     skrll   amt = sizeof (struct map_stub) * (top_id + 1);
   2425   1.1     skrll   htab->stub_group = bfd_zmalloc (amt);
   2426   1.1     skrll   if (htab->stub_group == NULL)
   2427   1.1     skrll     return -1;
   2428   1.1     skrll 
   2429   1.1     skrll   /* We can't use output_bfd->section_count here to find the top output
   2430   1.1     skrll      section index as some sections may have been removed, and
   2431   1.1     skrll      strip_excluded_output_sections doesn't renumber the indices.  */
   2432   1.1     skrll   for (section = output_bfd->sections, top_index = 0;
   2433   1.1     skrll        section != NULL;
   2434   1.1     skrll        section = section->next)
   2435   1.1     skrll     {
   2436   1.1     skrll       if (top_index < section->index)
   2437   1.1     skrll 	top_index = section->index;
   2438   1.1     skrll     }
   2439   1.1     skrll 
   2440   1.1     skrll   htab->top_index = top_index;
   2441   1.1     skrll   amt = sizeof (asection *) * (top_index + 1);
   2442   1.1     skrll   input_list = bfd_malloc (amt);
   2443   1.1     skrll   htab->input_list = input_list;
   2444   1.1     skrll   if (input_list == NULL)
   2445   1.1     skrll     return -1;
   2446   1.1     skrll 
   2447   1.1     skrll   /* For sections we aren't interested in, mark their entries with a
   2448   1.1     skrll      value we can check later.  */
   2449   1.1     skrll   list = input_list + top_index;
   2450   1.1     skrll   do
   2451   1.1     skrll     *list = bfd_abs_section_ptr;
   2452   1.1     skrll   while (list-- != input_list);
   2453   1.1     skrll 
   2454   1.1     skrll   for (section = output_bfd->sections;
   2455   1.1     skrll        section != NULL;
   2456   1.1     skrll        section = section->next)
   2457   1.1     skrll     {
   2458   1.1     skrll       if ((section->flags & SEC_CODE) != 0)
   2459   1.1     skrll 	input_list[section->index] = NULL;
   2460   1.1     skrll     }
   2461   1.1     skrll 
   2462   1.1     skrll   return 1;
   2463   1.1     skrll }
   2464   1.1     skrll 
   2465   1.1     skrll /* The linker repeatedly calls this function for each input section,
   2466   1.1     skrll    in the order that input sections are linked into output sections.
   2467   1.1     skrll    Build lists of input sections to determine groupings between which
   2468   1.1     skrll    we may insert linker stubs.  */
   2469   1.1     skrll 
   2470   1.1     skrll void
   2471   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_next_input_section (struct bfd_link_info *info, asection *isec)
   2472   1.1     skrll {
   2473   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   2474   1.1     skrll 
   2475   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   2476   1.3  christos     return;
   2477   1.3  christos 
   2478   1.1     skrll   if (isec->output_section->index <= htab->top_index)
   2479   1.1     skrll     {
   2480   1.1     skrll       asection **list = htab->input_list + isec->output_section->index;
   2481   1.1     skrll       if (*list != bfd_abs_section_ptr)
   2482   1.1     skrll 	{
   2483   1.1     skrll 	  /* Steal the link_sec pointer for our list.  */
   2484   1.1     skrll #define PREV_SEC(sec) (htab->stub_group[(sec)->id].link_sec)
   2485   1.1     skrll 	  /* This happens to make the list in reverse order,
   2486   1.1     skrll 	     which is what we want.  */
   2487   1.1     skrll 	  PREV_SEC (isec) = *list;
   2488   1.1     skrll 	  *list = isec;
   2489   1.1     skrll 	}
   2490   1.1     skrll     }
   2491   1.1     skrll }
   2492   1.1     skrll 
   2493   1.1     skrll /* See whether we can group stub sections together.  Grouping stub
   2494   1.1     skrll    sections may result in fewer stubs.  More importantly, we need to
   2495   1.1     skrll    put all .init* and .fini* stubs at the beginning of the .init or
   2496   1.1     skrll    .fini output sections respectively, because glibc splits the
   2497   1.1     skrll    _init and _fini functions into multiple parts.  Putting a stub in
   2498   1.1     skrll    the middle of a function is not a good idea.  */
   2499   1.1     skrll 
   2500   1.1     skrll static void
   2501   1.1     skrll group_sections (struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab,
   2502   1.1     skrll 		bfd_size_type stub_group_size,
   2503   1.1     skrll 		bfd_boolean stubs_always_before_branch)
   2504   1.1     skrll {
   2505   1.1     skrll   asection **list = htab->input_list + htab->top_index;
   2506   1.1     skrll   do
   2507   1.1     skrll     {
   2508   1.1     skrll       asection *tail = *list;
   2509   1.1     skrll       if (tail == bfd_abs_section_ptr)
   2510   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2511   1.1     skrll       while (tail != NULL)
   2512   1.1     skrll 	{
   2513   1.1     skrll 	  asection *curr;
   2514   1.1     skrll 	  asection *prev;
   2515   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_size_type total;
   2516   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_boolean big_sec;
   2517   1.1     skrll 
   2518   1.1     skrll 	  curr = tail;
   2519   1.1     skrll 	  total = tail->size;
   2520   1.1     skrll 	  big_sec = total >= stub_group_size;
   2521   1.1     skrll 
   2522   1.1     skrll 	  while ((prev = PREV_SEC (curr)) != NULL
   2523   1.1     skrll 		 && ((total += curr->output_offset - prev->output_offset)
   2524   1.1     skrll 		     < stub_group_size))
   2525   1.1     skrll 	    curr = prev;
   2526   1.1     skrll 
   2527   1.1     skrll 	  /* OK, the size from the start of CURR to the end is less
   2528   1.1     skrll 	     than 240000 bytes and thus can be handled by one stub
   2529   1.1     skrll 	     section.  (or the tail section is itself larger than
   2530   1.1     skrll 	     240000 bytes, in which case we may be toast.)
   2531   1.1     skrll 	     We should really be keeping track of the total size of
   2532   1.1     skrll 	     stubs added here, as stubs contribute to the final output
   2533   1.1     skrll 	     section size.  That's a little tricky, and this way will
   2534   1.1     skrll 	     only break if stubs added total more than 22144 bytes, or
   2535   1.1     skrll 	     2768 long branch stubs.  It seems unlikely for more than
   2536   1.1     skrll 	     2768 different functions to be called, especially from
   2537   1.1     skrll 	     code only 240000 bytes long.  This limit used to be
   2538   1.1     skrll 	     250000, but c++ code tends to generate lots of little
   2539   1.1     skrll 	     functions, and sometimes violated the assumption.  */
   2540   1.1     skrll 	  do
   2541   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2542   1.1     skrll 	      prev = PREV_SEC (tail);
   2543   1.1     skrll 	      /* Set up this stub group.  */
   2544   1.1     skrll 	      htab->stub_group[tail->id].link_sec = curr;
   2545   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2546   1.1     skrll 	  while (tail != curr && (tail = prev) != NULL);
   2547   1.1     skrll 
   2548   1.1     skrll 	  /* But wait, there's more!  Input sections up to 240000
   2549   1.1     skrll 	     bytes before the stub section can be handled by it too.
   2550   1.1     skrll 	     Don't do this if we have a really large section after the
   2551   1.1     skrll 	     stubs, as adding more stubs increases the chance that
   2552   1.1     skrll 	     branches may not reach into the stub section.  */
   2553   1.1     skrll 	  if (!stubs_always_before_branch && !big_sec)
   2554   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2555   1.1     skrll 	      total = 0;
   2556   1.1     skrll 	      while (prev != NULL
   2557   1.1     skrll 		     && ((total += tail->output_offset - prev->output_offset)
   2558   1.1     skrll 			 < stub_group_size))
   2559   1.1     skrll 		{
   2560   1.1     skrll 		  tail = prev;
   2561   1.1     skrll 		  prev = PREV_SEC (tail);
   2562   1.1     skrll 		  htab->stub_group[tail->id].link_sec = curr;
   2563   1.1     skrll 		}
   2564   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2565   1.1     skrll 	  tail = prev;
   2566   1.1     skrll 	}
   2567   1.1     skrll     }
   2568   1.1     skrll   while (list-- != htab->input_list);
   2569   1.1     skrll   free (htab->input_list);
   2570   1.1     skrll #undef PREV_SEC
   2571   1.1     skrll }
   2572   1.1     skrll 
   2573   1.1     skrll /* Read in all local syms for all input bfds, and create hash entries
   2574   1.1     skrll    for export stubs if we are building a multi-subspace shared lib.
   2575   1.1     skrll    Returns -1 on error, 1 if export stubs created, 0 otherwise.  */
   2576   1.1     skrll 
   2577   1.1     skrll static int
   2578   1.1     skrll get_local_syms (bfd *output_bfd, bfd *input_bfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
   2579   1.1     skrll {
   2580   1.1     skrll   unsigned int bfd_indx;
   2581   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Sym *local_syms, **all_local_syms;
   2582   1.1     skrll   int stub_changed = 0;
   2583   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   2584   1.1     skrll 
   2585   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   2586   1.3  christos     return -1;
   2587   1.3  christos 
   2588   1.1     skrll   /* We want to read in symbol extension records only once.  To do this
   2589   1.1     skrll      we need to read in the local symbols in parallel and save them for
   2590   1.1     skrll      later use; so hold pointers to the local symbols in an array.  */
   2591   1.1     skrll   bfd_size_type amt = sizeof (Elf_Internal_Sym *) * htab->bfd_count;
   2592   1.1     skrll   all_local_syms = bfd_zmalloc (amt);
   2593   1.1     skrll   htab->all_local_syms = all_local_syms;
   2594   1.1     skrll   if (all_local_syms == NULL)
   2595   1.1     skrll     return -1;
   2596   1.1     skrll 
   2597   1.1     skrll   /* Walk over all the input BFDs, swapping in local symbols.
   2598   1.1     skrll      If we are creating a shared library, create hash entries for the
   2599   1.1     skrll      export stubs.  */
   2600   1.1     skrll   for (bfd_indx = 0;
   2601   1.1     skrll        input_bfd != NULL;
   2602   1.7  christos        input_bfd = input_bfd->link.next, bfd_indx++)
   2603   1.1     skrll     {
   2604   1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   2605   1.1     skrll 
   2606   1.1     skrll       /* We'll need the symbol table in a second.  */
   2607   1.1     skrll       symtab_hdr = &elf_tdata (input_bfd)->symtab_hdr;
   2608   1.1     skrll       if (symtab_hdr->sh_info == 0)
   2609   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2610   1.1     skrll 
   2611   1.1     skrll       /* We need an array of the local symbols attached to the input bfd.  */
   2612   1.1     skrll       local_syms = (Elf_Internal_Sym *) symtab_hdr->contents;
   2613   1.1     skrll       if (local_syms == NULL)
   2614   1.1     skrll 	{
   2615   1.1     skrll 	  local_syms = bfd_elf_get_elf_syms (input_bfd, symtab_hdr,
   2616   1.1     skrll 					     symtab_hdr->sh_info, 0,
   2617   1.1     skrll 					     NULL, NULL, NULL);
   2618   1.1     skrll 	  /* Cache them for elf_link_input_bfd.  */
   2619   1.1     skrll 	  symtab_hdr->contents = (unsigned char *) local_syms;
   2620   1.1     skrll 	}
   2621   1.1     skrll       if (local_syms == NULL)
   2622   1.1     skrll 	return -1;
   2623   1.1     skrll 
   2624   1.1     skrll       all_local_syms[bfd_indx] = local_syms;
   2625   1.1     skrll 
   2626   1.7  christos       if (bfd_link_pic (info) && htab->multi_subspace)
   2627   1.1     skrll 	{
   2628   1.1     skrll 	  struct elf_link_hash_entry **eh_syms;
   2629   1.1     skrll 	  struct elf_link_hash_entry **eh_symend;
   2630   1.1     skrll 	  unsigned int symcount;
   2631   1.1     skrll 
   2632   1.1     skrll 	  symcount = (symtab_hdr->sh_size / sizeof (Elf32_External_Sym)
   2633   1.1     skrll 		      - symtab_hdr->sh_info);
   2634   1.1     skrll 	  eh_syms = (struct elf_link_hash_entry **) elf_sym_hashes (input_bfd);
   2635   1.1     skrll 	  eh_symend = (struct elf_link_hash_entry **) (eh_syms + symcount);
   2636   1.1     skrll 
   2637   1.1     skrll 	  /* Look through the global syms for functions;  We need to
   2638   1.1     skrll 	     build export stubs for all globally visible functions.  */
   2639   1.1     skrll 	  for (; eh_syms < eh_symend; eh_syms++)
   2640   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2641   1.1     skrll 	      struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   2642   1.1     skrll 
   2643   1.1     skrll 	      hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (*eh_syms);
   2644   1.1     skrll 
   2645   1.1     skrll 	      while (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect
   2646   1.1     skrll 		     || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_warning)
   2647   1.1     skrll 		   hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (hh->eh.root.u.i.link);
   2648   1.1     skrll 
   2649   1.1     skrll 	      /* At this point in the link, undefined syms have been
   2650   1.1     skrll 		 resolved, so we need to check that the symbol was
   2651   1.1     skrll 		 defined in this BFD.  */
   2652   1.1     skrll 	      if ((hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defined
   2653   1.1     skrll 		   || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak)
   2654   1.1     skrll 		  && hh->eh.type == STT_FUNC
   2655   1.1     skrll 		  && hh->eh.root.u.def.section->output_section != NULL
   2656   1.1     skrll 		  && (hh->eh.root.u.def.section->output_section->owner
   2657   1.1     skrll 		      == output_bfd)
   2658   1.1     skrll 		  && hh->eh.root.u.def.section->owner == input_bfd
   2659   1.1     skrll 		  && hh->eh.def_regular
   2660   1.1     skrll 		  && !hh->eh.forced_local
   2661   1.1     skrll 		  && ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (hh->eh.other) == STV_DEFAULT)
   2662   1.1     skrll 		{
   2663   1.1     skrll 		  asection *sec;
   2664   1.1     skrll 		  const char *stub_name;
   2665   1.1     skrll 		  struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh;
   2666   1.1     skrll 
   2667   1.1     skrll 		  sec = hh->eh.root.u.def.section;
   2668   1.1     skrll 		  stub_name = hh_name (hh);
   2669   1.1     skrll 		  hsh = hppa_stub_hash_lookup (&htab->bstab,
   2670   1.1     skrll 						      stub_name,
   2671   1.1     skrll 						      FALSE, FALSE);
   2672   1.1     skrll 		  if (hsh == NULL)
   2673   1.1     skrll 		    {
   2674   1.1     skrll 		      hsh = hppa_add_stub (stub_name, sec, htab);
   2675   1.1     skrll 		      if (!hsh)
   2676   1.1     skrll 			return -1;
   2677   1.1     skrll 
   2678   1.1     skrll 		      hsh->target_value = hh->eh.root.u.def.value;
   2679   1.1     skrll 		      hsh->target_section = hh->eh.root.u.def.section;
   2680   1.1     skrll 		      hsh->stub_type = hppa_stub_export;
   2681   1.1     skrll 		      hsh->hh = hh;
   2682   1.1     skrll 		      stub_changed = 1;
   2683   1.1     skrll 		    }
   2684   1.1     skrll 		  else
   2685   1.1     skrll 		    {
   2686  1.11  christos 		      /* xgettext:c-format */
   2687  1.12  christos 		      _bfd_error_handler (_("%pB: duplicate export stub %s"),
   2688  1.11  christos 					  input_bfd, stub_name);
   2689   1.1     skrll 		    }
   2690   1.1     skrll 		}
   2691   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2692   1.1     skrll 	}
   2693   1.1     skrll     }
   2694   1.1     skrll 
   2695   1.1     skrll   return stub_changed;
   2696   1.1     skrll }
   2697   1.1     skrll 
   2698   1.1     skrll /* Determine and set the size of the stub section for a final link.
   2699   1.1     skrll 
   2700   1.1     skrll    The basic idea here is to examine all the relocations looking for
   2701   1.1     skrll    PC-relative calls to a target that is unreachable with a "bl"
   2702   1.1     skrll    instruction.  */
   2703   1.1     skrll 
   2704   1.1     skrll bfd_boolean
   2705   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_size_stubs
   2706   1.1     skrll   (bfd *output_bfd, bfd *stub_bfd, struct bfd_link_info *info,
   2707   1.1     skrll    bfd_boolean multi_subspace, bfd_signed_vma group_size,
   2708   1.1     skrll    asection * (*add_stub_section) (const char *, asection *),
   2709   1.1     skrll    void (*layout_sections_again) (void))
   2710   1.1     skrll {
   2711   1.1     skrll   bfd_size_type stub_group_size;
   2712   1.1     skrll   bfd_boolean stubs_always_before_branch;
   2713   1.1     skrll   bfd_boolean stub_changed;
   2714   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   2715   1.1     skrll 
   2716   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   2717   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   2718   1.3  christos 
   2719   1.1     skrll   /* Stash our params away.  */
   2720   1.1     skrll   htab->stub_bfd = stub_bfd;
   2721   1.1     skrll   htab->multi_subspace = multi_subspace;
   2722   1.1     skrll   htab->add_stub_section = add_stub_section;
   2723   1.1     skrll   htab->layout_sections_again = layout_sections_again;
   2724   1.1     skrll   stubs_always_before_branch = group_size < 0;
   2725   1.1     skrll   if (group_size < 0)
   2726   1.1     skrll     stub_group_size = -group_size;
   2727   1.1     skrll   else
   2728   1.1     skrll     stub_group_size = group_size;
   2729   1.1     skrll   if (stub_group_size == 1)
   2730   1.1     skrll     {
   2731   1.1     skrll       /* Default values.  */
   2732   1.1     skrll       if (stubs_always_before_branch)
   2733   1.1     skrll 	{
   2734   1.1     skrll 	  stub_group_size = 7680000;
   2735   1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->has_17bit_branch || htab->multi_subspace)
   2736   1.1     skrll 	    stub_group_size = 240000;
   2737   1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->has_12bit_branch)
   2738   1.1     skrll 	    stub_group_size = 7500;
   2739   1.1     skrll 	}
   2740   1.1     skrll       else
   2741   1.1     skrll 	{
   2742   1.1     skrll 	  stub_group_size = 6971392;
   2743   1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->has_17bit_branch || htab->multi_subspace)
   2744   1.1     skrll 	    stub_group_size = 217856;
   2745   1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->has_12bit_branch)
   2746   1.1     skrll 	    stub_group_size = 6808;
   2747   1.1     skrll 	}
   2748   1.1     skrll     }
   2749   1.1     skrll 
   2750   1.1     skrll   group_sections (htab, stub_group_size, stubs_always_before_branch);
   2751   1.1     skrll 
   2752   1.1     skrll   switch (get_local_syms (output_bfd, info->input_bfds, info))
   2753   1.1     skrll     {
   2754   1.1     skrll     default:
   2755   1.1     skrll       if (htab->all_local_syms)
   2756   1.1     skrll 	goto error_ret_free_local;
   2757   1.1     skrll       return FALSE;
   2758   1.1     skrll 
   2759   1.1     skrll     case 0:
   2760   1.1     skrll       stub_changed = FALSE;
   2761   1.1     skrll       break;
   2762   1.1     skrll 
   2763   1.1     skrll     case 1:
   2764   1.1     skrll       stub_changed = TRUE;
   2765   1.1     skrll       break;
   2766   1.1     skrll     }
   2767   1.1     skrll 
   2768   1.1     skrll   while (1)
   2769   1.1     skrll     {
   2770   1.1     skrll       bfd *input_bfd;
   2771   1.1     skrll       unsigned int bfd_indx;
   2772   1.1     skrll       asection *stub_sec;
   2773   1.1     skrll 
   2774   1.1     skrll       for (input_bfd = info->input_bfds, bfd_indx = 0;
   2775   1.1     skrll 	   input_bfd != NULL;
   2776   1.7  christos 	   input_bfd = input_bfd->link.next, bfd_indx++)
   2777   1.1     skrll 	{
   2778   1.1     skrll 	  Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   2779   1.1     skrll 	  asection *section;
   2780   1.1     skrll 	  Elf_Internal_Sym *local_syms;
   2781   1.1     skrll 
   2782   1.1     skrll 	  /* We'll need the symbol table in a second.  */
   2783   1.1     skrll 	  symtab_hdr = &elf_tdata (input_bfd)->symtab_hdr;
   2784   1.1     skrll 	  if (symtab_hdr->sh_info == 0)
   2785   1.1     skrll 	    continue;
   2786   1.1     skrll 
   2787   1.1     skrll 	  local_syms = htab->all_local_syms[bfd_indx];
   2788   1.1     skrll 
   2789   1.1     skrll 	  /* Walk over each section attached to the input bfd.  */
   2790   1.1     skrll 	  for (section = input_bfd->sections;
   2791   1.1     skrll 	       section != NULL;
   2792   1.1     skrll 	       section = section->next)
   2793   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2794   1.1     skrll 	      Elf_Internal_Rela *internal_relocs, *irelaend, *irela;
   2795   1.1     skrll 
   2796   1.1     skrll 	      /* If there aren't any relocs, then there's nothing more
   2797   1.1     skrll 		 to do.  */
   2798   1.1     skrll 	      if ((section->flags & SEC_RELOC) == 0
   2799  1.12  christos 		  || (section->flags & SEC_ALLOC) == 0
   2800  1.12  christos 		  || (section->flags & SEC_LOAD) == 0
   2801  1.12  christos 		  || (section->flags & SEC_CODE) == 0
   2802   1.1     skrll 		  || section->reloc_count == 0)
   2803   1.1     skrll 		continue;
   2804   1.1     skrll 
   2805   1.1     skrll 	      /* If this section is a link-once section that will be
   2806   1.1     skrll 		 discarded, then don't create any stubs.  */
   2807   1.1     skrll 	      if (section->output_section == NULL
   2808   1.1     skrll 		  || section->output_section->owner != output_bfd)
   2809   1.1     skrll 		continue;
   2810   1.1     skrll 
   2811   1.1     skrll 	      /* Get the relocs.  */
   2812   1.1     skrll 	      internal_relocs
   2813   1.1     skrll 		= _bfd_elf_link_read_relocs (input_bfd, section, NULL, NULL,
   2814   1.1     skrll 					     info->keep_memory);
   2815   1.1     skrll 	      if (internal_relocs == NULL)
   2816   1.1     skrll 		goto error_ret_free_local;
   2817   1.1     skrll 
   2818   1.1     skrll 	      /* Now examine each relocation.  */
   2819   1.1     skrll 	      irela = internal_relocs;
   2820   1.1     skrll 	      irelaend = irela + section->reloc_count;
   2821   1.1     skrll 	      for (; irela < irelaend; irela++)
   2822   1.1     skrll 		{
   2823   1.1     skrll 		  unsigned int r_type, r_indx;
   2824   1.1     skrll 		  enum elf32_hppa_stub_type stub_type;
   2825   1.1     skrll 		  struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh;
   2826   1.1     skrll 		  asection *sym_sec;
   2827   1.1     skrll 		  bfd_vma sym_value;
   2828   1.1     skrll 		  bfd_vma destination;
   2829   1.1     skrll 		  struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   2830   1.1     skrll 		  char *stub_name;
   2831   1.1     skrll 		  const asection *id_sec;
   2832   1.1     skrll 
   2833   1.1     skrll 		  r_type = ELF32_R_TYPE (irela->r_info);
   2834   1.1     skrll 		  r_indx = ELF32_R_SYM (irela->r_info);
   2835   1.1     skrll 
   2836   1.1     skrll 		  if (r_type >= (unsigned int) R_PARISC_UNIMPLEMENTED)
   2837   1.1     skrll 		    {
   2838   1.1     skrll 		      bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   2839   1.1     skrll 		    error_ret_free_internal:
   2840   1.1     skrll 		      if (elf_section_data (section)->relocs == NULL)
   2841   1.1     skrll 			free (internal_relocs);
   2842   1.1     skrll 		      goto error_ret_free_local;
   2843   1.1     skrll 		    }
   2844   1.1     skrll 
   2845   1.1     skrll 		  /* Only look for stubs on call instructions.  */
   2846   1.1     skrll 		  if (r_type != (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL12F
   2847   1.1     skrll 		      && r_type != (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL17F
   2848   1.1     skrll 		      && r_type != (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL22F)
   2849   1.1     skrll 		    continue;
   2850   1.1     skrll 
   2851   1.1     skrll 		  /* Now determine the call target, its name, value,
   2852   1.1     skrll 		     section.  */
   2853   1.1     skrll 		  sym_sec = NULL;
   2854   1.1     skrll 		  sym_value = 0;
   2855  1.12  christos 		  destination = -1;
   2856   1.1     skrll 		  hh = NULL;
   2857   1.1     skrll 		  if (r_indx < symtab_hdr->sh_info)
   2858   1.1     skrll 		    {
   2859   1.1     skrll 		      /* It's a local symbol.  */
   2860   1.1     skrll 		      Elf_Internal_Sym *sym;
   2861   1.1     skrll 		      Elf_Internal_Shdr *hdr;
   2862   1.1     skrll 		      unsigned int shndx;
   2863   1.1     skrll 
   2864   1.1     skrll 		      sym = local_syms + r_indx;
   2865   1.1     skrll 		      if (ELF_ST_TYPE (sym->st_info) != STT_SECTION)
   2866   1.1     skrll 			sym_value = sym->st_value;
   2867   1.1     skrll 		      shndx = sym->st_shndx;
   2868   1.1     skrll 		      if (shndx < elf_numsections (input_bfd))
   2869   1.1     skrll 			{
   2870   1.1     skrll 			  hdr = elf_elfsections (input_bfd)[shndx];
   2871   1.1     skrll 			  sym_sec = hdr->bfd_section;
   2872   1.1     skrll 			  destination = (sym_value + irela->r_addend
   2873   1.1     skrll 					 + sym_sec->output_offset
   2874   1.1     skrll 					 + sym_sec->output_section->vma);
   2875   1.1     skrll 			}
   2876   1.1     skrll 		    }
   2877   1.1     skrll 		  else
   2878   1.1     skrll 		    {
   2879   1.1     skrll 		      /* It's an external symbol.  */
   2880   1.1     skrll 		      int e_indx;
   2881   1.1     skrll 
   2882   1.1     skrll 		      e_indx = r_indx - symtab_hdr->sh_info;
   2883   1.1     skrll 		      hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (elf_sym_hashes (input_bfd)[e_indx]);
   2884   1.1     skrll 
   2885   1.1     skrll 		      while (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect
   2886   1.1     skrll 			     || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_warning)
   2887   1.1     skrll 			hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (hh->eh.root.u.i.link);
   2888   1.1     skrll 
   2889   1.1     skrll 		      if (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defined
   2890   1.1     skrll 			  || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak)
   2891   1.1     skrll 			{
   2892   1.1     skrll 			  sym_sec = hh->eh.root.u.def.section;
   2893   1.1     skrll 			  sym_value = hh->eh.root.u.def.value;
   2894   1.1     skrll 			  if (sym_sec->output_section != NULL)
   2895   1.1     skrll 			    destination = (sym_value + irela->r_addend
   2896   1.1     skrll 					   + sym_sec->output_offset
   2897   1.1     skrll 					   + sym_sec->output_section->vma);
   2898   1.1     skrll 			}
   2899   1.1     skrll 		      else if (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak)
   2900   1.1     skrll 			{
   2901   1.7  christos 			  if (! bfd_link_pic (info))
   2902   1.1     skrll 			    continue;
   2903   1.1     skrll 			}
   2904   1.1     skrll 		      else if (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefined)
   2905   1.1     skrll 			{
   2906   1.1     skrll 			  if (! (info->unresolved_syms_in_objects == RM_IGNORE
   2907   1.1     skrll 				 && (ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (hh->eh.other)
   2908   1.1     skrll 				     == STV_DEFAULT)
   2909   1.1     skrll 				 && hh->eh.type != STT_PARISC_MILLI))
   2910   1.1     skrll 			    continue;
   2911   1.1     skrll 			}
   2912   1.1     skrll 		      else
   2913   1.1     skrll 			{
   2914   1.1     skrll 			  bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   2915   1.1     skrll 			  goto error_ret_free_internal;
   2916   1.1     skrll 			}
   2917   1.1     skrll 		    }
   2918   1.1     skrll 
   2919   1.1     skrll 		  /* Determine what (if any) linker stub is needed.  */
   2920   1.1     skrll 		  stub_type = hppa_type_of_stub (section, irela, hh,
   2921   1.1     skrll 						 destination, info);
   2922   1.1     skrll 		  if (stub_type == hppa_stub_none)
   2923   1.1     skrll 		    continue;
   2924   1.1     skrll 
   2925   1.1     skrll 		  /* Support for grouping stub sections.  */
   2926   1.1     skrll 		  id_sec = htab->stub_group[section->id].link_sec;
   2927   1.1     skrll 
   2928   1.1     skrll 		  /* Get the name of this stub.  */
   2929   1.1     skrll 		  stub_name = hppa_stub_name (id_sec, sym_sec, hh, irela);
   2930   1.1     skrll 		  if (!stub_name)
   2931   1.1     skrll 		    goto error_ret_free_internal;
   2932   1.1     skrll 
   2933   1.1     skrll 		  hsh = hppa_stub_hash_lookup (&htab->bstab,
   2934   1.1     skrll 						      stub_name,
   2935   1.1     skrll 						      FALSE, FALSE);
   2936   1.1     skrll 		  if (hsh != NULL)
   2937   1.1     skrll 		    {
   2938   1.1     skrll 		      /* The proper stub has already been created.  */
   2939   1.1     skrll 		      free (stub_name);
   2940   1.1     skrll 		      continue;
   2941   1.1     skrll 		    }
   2942   1.1     skrll 
   2943   1.1     skrll 		  hsh = hppa_add_stub (stub_name, section, htab);
   2944   1.1     skrll 		  if (hsh == NULL)
   2945   1.1     skrll 		    {
   2946   1.1     skrll 		      free (stub_name);
   2947   1.1     skrll 		      goto error_ret_free_internal;
   2948   1.1     skrll 		    }
   2949   1.1     skrll 
   2950   1.1     skrll 		  hsh->target_value = sym_value;
   2951   1.1     skrll 		  hsh->target_section = sym_sec;
   2952   1.1     skrll 		  hsh->stub_type = stub_type;
   2953   1.7  christos 		  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   2954   1.1     skrll 		    {
   2955   1.1     skrll 		      if (stub_type == hppa_stub_import)
   2956   1.1     skrll 			hsh->stub_type = hppa_stub_import_shared;
   2957   1.1     skrll 		      else if (stub_type == hppa_stub_long_branch)
   2958   1.1     skrll 			hsh->stub_type = hppa_stub_long_branch_shared;
   2959   1.1     skrll 		    }
   2960   1.1     skrll 		  hsh->hh = hh;
   2961   1.1     skrll 		  stub_changed = TRUE;
   2962   1.1     skrll 		}
   2963   1.1     skrll 
   2964   1.1     skrll 	      /* We're done with the internal relocs, free them.  */
   2965   1.1     skrll 	      if (elf_section_data (section)->relocs == NULL)
   2966   1.1     skrll 		free (internal_relocs);
   2967   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2968   1.1     skrll 	}
   2969   1.1     skrll 
   2970   1.1     skrll       if (!stub_changed)
   2971   1.1     skrll 	break;
   2972   1.1     skrll 
   2973   1.1     skrll       /* OK, we've added some stubs.  Find out the new size of the
   2974   1.1     skrll 	 stub sections.  */
   2975   1.1     skrll       for (stub_sec = htab->stub_bfd->sections;
   2976   1.1     skrll 	   stub_sec != NULL;
   2977   1.1     skrll 	   stub_sec = stub_sec->next)
   2978  1.10  christos 	if ((stub_sec->flags & SEC_LINKER_CREATED) == 0)
   2979  1.10  christos 	  stub_sec->size = 0;
   2980   1.1     skrll 
   2981   1.1     skrll       bfd_hash_traverse (&htab->bstab, hppa_size_one_stub, htab);
   2982   1.1     skrll 
   2983   1.1     skrll       /* Ask the linker to do its stuff.  */
   2984   1.1     skrll       (*htab->layout_sections_again) ();
   2985   1.1     skrll       stub_changed = FALSE;
   2986   1.1     skrll     }
   2987   1.1     skrll 
   2988   1.1     skrll   free (htab->all_local_syms);
   2989   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   2990   1.1     skrll 
   2991   1.1     skrll  error_ret_free_local:
   2992   1.1     skrll   free (htab->all_local_syms);
   2993   1.1     skrll   return FALSE;
   2994   1.1     skrll }
   2995   1.1     skrll 
   2996   1.1     skrll /* For a final link, this function is called after we have sized the
   2997   1.1     skrll    stubs to provide a value for __gp.  */
   2998   1.1     skrll 
   2999   1.1     skrll bfd_boolean
   3000   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_set_gp (bfd *abfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
   3001   1.1     skrll {
   3002   1.1     skrll   struct bfd_link_hash_entry *h;
   3003   1.1     skrll   asection *sec = NULL;
   3004   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma gp_val = 0;
   3005   1.1     skrll 
   3006  1.11  christos   h = bfd_link_hash_lookup (info->hash, "$global$", FALSE, FALSE, FALSE);
   3007   1.1     skrll 
   3008   1.1     skrll   if (h != NULL
   3009   1.1     skrll       && (h->type == bfd_link_hash_defined
   3010   1.1     skrll 	  || h->type == bfd_link_hash_defweak))
   3011   1.1     skrll     {
   3012   1.1     skrll       gp_val = h->u.def.value;
   3013   1.1     skrll       sec = h->u.def.section;
   3014   1.1     skrll     }
   3015   1.1     skrll   else
   3016   1.1     skrll     {
   3017   1.1     skrll       asection *splt = bfd_get_section_by_name (abfd, ".plt");
   3018   1.1     skrll       asection *sgot = bfd_get_section_by_name (abfd, ".got");
   3019   1.1     skrll 
   3020   1.1     skrll       /* Choose to point our LTP at, in this order, one of .plt, .got,
   3021   1.1     skrll 	 or .data, if these sections exist.  In the case of choosing
   3022   1.1     skrll 	 .plt try to make the LTP ideal for addressing anywhere in the
   3023   1.1     skrll 	 .plt or .got with a 14 bit signed offset.  Typically, the end
   3024   1.1     skrll 	 of the .plt is the start of the .got, so choose .plt + 0x2000
   3025   1.1     skrll 	 if either the .plt or .got is larger than 0x2000.  If both
   3026   1.1     skrll 	 the .plt and .got are smaller than 0x2000, choose the end of
   3027   1.1     skrll 	 the .plt section.  */
   3028   1.1     skrll       sec = strcmp (bfd_get_target (abfd), "elf32-hppa-netbsd") == 0
   3029   1.1     skrll 	  ? NULL : splt;
   3030   1.1     skrll       if (sec != NULL)
   3031   1.1     skrll 	{
   3032   1.1     skrll 	  gp_val = sec->size;
   3033   1.1     skrll 	  if (gp_val > 0x2000 || (sgot && sgot->size > 0x2000))
   3034   1.1     skrll 	    {
   3035   1.1     skrll 	      gp_val = 0x2000;
   3036   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3037   1.1     skrll 	}
   3038   1.1     skrll       else
   3039   1.1     skrll 	{
   3040   1.1     skrll 	  sec = sgot;
   3041   1.1     skrll 	  if (sec != NULL)
   3042   1.1     skrll 	    {
   3043   1.1     skrll 	      if (strcmp (bfd_get_target (abfd), "elf32-hppa-netbsd") != 0)
   3044   1.1     skrll 		{
   3045  1.11  christos 		  /* We know we don't have a .plt.  If .got is large,
   3046   1.1     skrll 		     offset our LTP.  */
   3047  1.11  christos 		  if (sec->size > 0x2000)
   3048   1.1     skrll 		    gp_val = 0x2000;
   3049   1.1     skrll 		}
   3050   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3051   1.1     skrll 	  else
   3052   1.1     skrll 	    {
   3053   1.1     skrll 	      /* No .plt or .got.  Who cares what the LTP is?  */
   3054   1.1     skrll 	      sec = bfd_get_section_by_name (abfd, ".data");
   3055   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3056   1.1     skrll 	}
   3057   1.1     skrll 
   3058   1.1     skrll       if (h != NULL)
   3059   1.1     skrll 	{
   3060   1.1     skrll 	  h->type = bfd_link_hash_defined;
   3061   1.1     skrll 	  h->u.def.value = gp_val;
   3062   1.1     skrll 	  if (sec != NULL)
   3063   1.1     skrll 	    h->u.def.section = sec;
   3064   1.1     skrll 	  else
   3065   1.1     skrll 	    h->u.def.section = bfd_abs_section_ptr;
   3066   1.1     skrll 	}
   3067   1.1     skrll     }
   3068   1.1     skrll 
   3069  1.11  christos   if (bfd_get_flavour (abfd) == bfd_target_elf_flavour)
   3070  1.11  christos     {
   3071  1.11  christos       if (sec != NULL && sec->output_section != NULL)
   3072  1.11  christos 	gp_val += sec->output_section->vma + sec->output_offset;
   3073   1.1     skrll 
   3074  1.11  christos       elf_gp (abfd) = gp_val;
   3075  1.11  christos     }
   3076   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   3077   1.1     skrll }
   3078   1.1     skrll 
   3079   1.1     skrll /* Build all the stubs associated with the current output file.  The
   3080   1.1     skrll    stubs are kept in a hash table attached to the main linker hash
   3081   1.1     skrll    table.  We also set up the .plt entries for statically linked PIC
   3082   1.1     skrll    functions here.  This function is called via hppaelf_finish in the
   3083   1.1     skrll    linker.  */
   3084   1.1     skrll 
   3085   1.1     skrll bfd_boolean
   3086   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_build_stubs (struct bfd_link_info *info)
   3087   1.1     skrll {
   3088   1.1     skrll   asection *stub_sec;
   3089   1.1     skrll   struct bfd_hash_table *table;
   3090   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   3091   1.1     skrll 
   3092   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   3093   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   3094   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   3095   1.1     skrll 
   3096   1.1     skrll   for (stub_sec = htab->stub_bfd->sections;
   3097   1.1     skrll        stub_sec != NULL;
   3098   1.1     skrll        stub_sec = stub_sec->next)
   3099  1.10  christos     if ((stub_sec->flags & SEC_LINKER_CREATED) == 0
   3100  1.10  christos 	&& stub_sec->size != 0)
   3101  1.10  christos       {
   3102  1.10  christos 	/* Allocate memory to hold the linker stubs.  */
   3103  1.10  christos 	stub_sec->contents = bfd_zalloc (htab->stub_bfd, stub_sec->size);
   3104  1.10  christos 	if (stub_sec->contents == NULL)
   3105  1.10  christos 	  return FALSE;
   3106  1.10  christos 	stub_sec->size = 0;
   3107  1.10  christos       }
   3108   1.1     skrll 
   3109   1.1     skrll   /* Build the stubs as directed by the stub hash table.  */
   3110   1.1     skrll   table = &htab->bstab;
   3111   1.1     skrll   bfd_hash_traverse (table, hppa_build_one_stub, info);
   3112   1.1     skrll 
   3113   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   3114   1.1     skrll }
   3115   1.1     skrll 
   3116   1.1     skrll /* Return the base vma address which should be subtracted from the real
   3117   1.7  christos    address when resolving a dtpoff relocation.
   3118   1.1     skrll    This is PT_TLS segment p_vaddr.  */
   3119   1.1     skrll 
   3120   1.1     skrll static bfd_vma
   3121   1.1     skrll dtpoff_base (struct bfd_link_info *info)
   3122   1.1     skrll {
   3123   1.1     skrll   /* If tls_sec is NULL, we should have signalled an error already.  */
   3124   1.1     skrll   if (elf_hash_table (info)->tls_sec == NULL)
   3125   1.1     skrll     return 0;
   3126   1.1     skrll   return elf_hash_table (info)->tls_sec->vma;
   3127   1.1     skrll }
   3128   1.1     skrll 
   3129   1.1     skrll /* Return the relocation value for R_PARISC_TLS_TPOFF*..  */
   3130   1.1     skrll 
   3131   1.1     skrll static bfd_vma
   3132   1.1     skrll tpoff (struct bfd_link_info *info, bfd_vma address)
   3133   1.1     skrll {
   3134   1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_table *htab = elf_hash_table (info);
   3135   1.1     skrll 
   3136   1.1     skrll   /* If tls_sec is NULL, we should have signalled an error already.  */
   3137   1.1     skrll   if (htab->tls_sec == NULL)
   3138   1.1     skrll     return 0;
   3139   1.7  christos   /* hppa TLS ABI is variant I and static TLS block start just after
   3140   1.1     skrll      tcbhead structure which has 2 pointer fields.  */
   3141   1.7  christos   return (address - htab->tls_sec->vma
   3142   1.1     skrll 	  + align_power ((bfd_vma) 8, htab->tls_sec->alignment_power));
   3143   1.1     skrll }
   3144   1.1     skrll 
   3145   1.1     skrll /* Perform a final link.  */
   3146   1.1     skrll 
   3147   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   3148   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_final_link (bfd *abfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
   3149   1.1     skrll {
   3150   1.9  christos   struct stat buf;
   3151   1.9  christos 
   3152   1.1     skrll   /* Invoke the regular ELF linker to do all the work.  */
   3153   1.1     skrll   if (!bfd_elf_final_link (abfd, info))
   3154   1.1     skrll     return FALSE;
   3155   1.1     skrll 
   3156   1.1     skrll   /* If we're producing a final executable, sort the contents of the
   3157   1.1     skrll      unwind section.  */
   3158   1.7  christos   if (bfd_link_relocatable (info))
   3159   1.3  christos     return TRUE;
   3160   1.3  christos 
   3161   1.9  christos   /* Do not attempt to sort non-regular files.  This is here
   3162   1.9  christos      especially for configure scripts and kernel builds which run
   3163   1.9  christos      tests with "ld [...] -o /dev/null".  */
   3164   1.9  christos   if (stat (abfd->filename, &buf) != 0
   3165   1.9  christos       || !S_ISREG(buf.st_mode))
   3166   1.9  christos     return TRUE;
   3167   1.9  christos 
   3168   1.1     skrll   return elf_hppa_sort_unwind (abfd);
   3169   1.1     skrll }
   3170   1.1     skrll 
   3171   1.1     skrll /* Record the lowest address for the data and text segments.  */
   3172   1.1     skrll 
   3173   1.1     skrll static void
   3174   1.1     skrll hppa_record_segment_addr (bfd *abfd, asection *section, void *data)
   3175   1.1     skrll {
   3176   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   3177   1.1     skrll 
   3178   1.1     skrll   htab = (struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table*) data;
   3179   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   3180   1.3  christos     return;
   3181   1.1     skrll 
   3182   1.1     skrll   if ((section->flags & (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD)) == (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD))
   3183   1.1     skrll     {
   3184   1.1     skrll       bfd_vma value;
   3185   1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Phdr *p;
   3186   1.1     skrll 
   3187   1.1     skrll       p = _bfd_elf_find_segment_containing_section (abfd, section->output_section);
   3188   1.1     skrll       BFD_ASSERT (p != NULL);
   3189   1.1     skrll       value = p->p_vaddr;
   3190   1.1     skrll 
   3191   1.1     skrll       if ((section->flags & SEC_READONLY) != 0)
   3192   1.1     skrll 	{
   3193   1.1     skrll 	  if (value < htab->text_segment_base)
   3194   1.1     skrll 	    htab->text_segment_base = value;
   3195   1.1     skrll 	}
   3196   1.1     skrll       else
   3197   1.1     skrll 	{
   3198   1.1     skrll 	  if (value < htab->data_segment_base)
   3199   1.1     skrll 	    htab->data_segment_base = value;
   3200   1.1     skrll 	}
   3201   1.1     skrll     }
   3202   1.1     skrll }
   3203   1.1     skrll 
   3204   1.1     skrll /* Perform a relocation as part of a final link.  */
   3205   1.1     skrll 
   3206   1.1     skrll static bfd_reloc_status_type
   3207   1.1     skrll final_link_relocate (asection *input_section,
   3208   1.1     skrll 		     bfd_byte *contents,
   3209   1.1     skrll 		     const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela,
   3210   1.1     skrll 		     bfd_vma value,
   3211   1.1     skrll 		     struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab,
   3212   1.1     skrll 		     asection *sym_sec,
   3213   1.1     skrll 		     struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh,
   3214   1.1     skrll 		     struct bfd_link_info *info)
   3215   1.1     skrll {
   3216   1.1     skrll   int insn;
   3217   1.1     skrll   unsigned int r_type = ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info);
   3218   1.1     skrll   unsigned int orig_r_type = r_type;
   3219   1.1     skrll   reloc_howto_type *howto = elf_hppa_howto_table + r_type;
   3220   1.1     skrll   int r_format = howto->bitsize;
   3221   1.1     skrll   enum hppa_reloc_field_selector_type_alt r_field;
   3222   1.1     skrll   bfd *input_bfd = input_section->owner;
   3223   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma offset = rela->r_offset;
   3224   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma max_branch_offset = 0;
   3225   1.1     skrll   bfd_byte *hit_data = contents + offset;
   3226   1.1     skrll   bfd_signed_vma addend = rela->r_addend;
   3227   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma location;
   3228   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh = NULL;
   3229   1.7  christos   int val;
   3230   1.1     skrll 
   3231   1.1     skrll   if (r_type == R_PARISC_NONE)
   3232   1.1     skrll     return bfd_reloc_ok;
   3233   1.1     skrll 
   3234   1.1     skrll   insn = bfd_get_32 (input_bfd, hit_data);
   3235   1.1     skrll 
   3236   1.1     skrll   /* Find out where we are and where we're going.  */
   3237   1.1     skrll   location = (offset +
   3238   1.1     skrll 	      input_section->output_offset +
   3239   1.1     skrll 	      input_section->output_section->vma);
   3240   1.1     skrll 
   3241   1.1     skrll   /* If we are not building a shared library, convert DLTIND relocs to
   3242   1.1     skrll      DPREL relocs.  */
   3243   1.7  christos   if (!bfd_link_pic (info))
   3244   1.1     skrll     {
   3245   1.1     skrll       switch (r_type)
   3246   1.1     skrll 	{
   3247   1.1     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_DLTIND21L:
   3248   1.5     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L:
   3249   1.5     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L:
   3250   1.5     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L:
   3251   1.1     skrll 	    r_type = R_PARISC_DPREL21L;
   3252   1.1     skrll 	    break;
   3253   1.1     skrll 
   3254   1.1     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_DLTIND14R:
   3255   1.5     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R:
   3256   1.5     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R:
   3257   1.5     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_TLS_IE14R:
   3258   1.1     skrll 	    r_type = R_PARISC_DPREL14R;
   3259   1.1     skrll 	    break;
   3260   1.1     skrll 
   3261   1.1     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_DLTIND14F:
   3262   1.1     skrll 	    r_type = R_PARISC_DPREL14F;
   3263   1.1     skrll 	    break;
   3264   1.1     skrll 	}
   3265   1.1     skrll     }
   3266   1.1     skrll 
   3267   1.1     skrll   switch (r_type)
   3268   1.1     skrll     {
   3269   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL12F:
   3270   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17F:
   3271   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL22F:
   3272   1.1     skrll       /* If this call should go via the plt, find the import stub in
   3273   1.1     skrll 	 the stub hash.  */
   3274   1.1     skrll       if (sym_sec == NULL
   3275   1.1     skrll 	  || sym_sec->output_section == NULL
   3276   1.1     skrll 	  || (hh != NULL
   3277   1.1     skrll 	      && hh->eh.plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1
   3278   1.1     skrll 	      && hh->eh.dynindx != -1
   3279   1.1     skrll 	      && !hh->plabel
   3280   1.7  christos 	      && (bfd_link_pic (info)
   3281   1.1     skrll 		  || !hh->eh.def_regular
   3282   1.1     skrll 		  || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak)))
   3283   1.1     skrll 	{
   3284   1.1     skrll 	  hsh = hppa_get_stub_entry (input_section, sym_sec,
   3285  1.12  christos 				     hh, rela, htab);
   3286   1.1     skrll 	  if (hsh != NULL)
   3287   1.1     skrll 	    {
   3288   1.1     skrll 	      value = (hsh->stub_offset
   3289   1.1     skrll 		       + hsh->stub_sec->output_offset
   3290   1.1     skrll 		       + hsh->stub_sec->output_section->vma);
   3291   1.1     skrll 	      addend = 0;
   3292   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3293   1.1     skrll 	  else if (sym_sec == NULL && hh != NULL
   3294   1.1     skrll 		   && hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak)
   3295   1.1     skrll 	    {
   3296   1.1     skrll 	      /* It's OK if undefined weak.  Calls to undefined weak
   3297   1.1     skrll 		 symbols behave as if the "called" function
   3298   1.1     skrll 		 immediately returns.  We can thus call to a weak
   3299   1.1     skrll 		 function without first checking whether the function
   3300   1.1     skrll 		 is defined.  */
   3301   1.1     skrll 	      value = location;
   3302   1.1     skrll 	      addend = 8;
   3303   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3304   1.1     skrll 	  else
   3305   1.1     skrll 	    return bfd_reloc_undefined;
   3306   1.1     skrll 	}
   3307   1.1     skrll       /* Fall thru.  */
   3308   1.1     skrll 
   3309   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL21L:
   3310   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17C:
   3311   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17R:
   3312   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL14R:
   3313   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL14F:
   3314   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL32:
   3315   1.1     skrll       /* Make it a pc relative offset.  */
   3316   1.1     skrll       value -= location;
   3317   1.1     skrll       addend -= 8;
   3318   1.1     skrll       break;
   3319   1.1     skrll 
   3320   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DPREL21L:
   3321   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DPREL14R:
   3322   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DPREL14F:
   3323   1.1     skrll       /* Convert instructions that use the linkage table pointer (r19) to
   3324   1.1     skrll 	 instructions that use the global data pointer (dp).  This is the
   3325   1.1     skrll 	 most efficient way of using PIC code in an incomplete executable,
   3326   1.1     skrll 	 but the user must follow the standard runtime conventions for
   3327   1.1     skrll 	 accessing data for this to work.  */
   3328   1.5     skrll       if (orig_r_type != r_type)
   3329   1.1     skrll 	{
   3330   1.5     skrll 	  if (r_type == R_PARISC_DPREL21L)
   3331   1.5     skrll 	    {
   3332   1.5     skrll 	      /* GCC sometimes uses a register other than r19 for the
   3333   1.5     skrll 		 operation, so we must convert any addil instruction
   3334   1.5     skrll 		 that uses this relocation.  */
   3335   1.5     skrll 	      if ((insn & 0xfc000000) == ((int) OP_ADDIL << 26))
   3336   1.5     skrll 		insn = ADDIL_DP;
   3337   1.5     skrll 	      else
   3338   1.5     skrll 		/* We must have a ldil instruction.  It's too hard to find
   3339   1.5     skrll 		   and convert the associated add instruction, so issue an
   3340   1.5     skrll 		   error.  */
   3341  1.11  christos 		_bfd_error_handler
   3342  1.11  christos 		  /* xgettext:c-format */
   3343  1.12  christos 		  (_("%pB(%pA+%#" PRIx64 "): %s fixup for insn %#x "
   3344  1.12  christos 		     "is not supported in a non-shared link"),
   3345   1.5     skrll 		   input_bfd,
   3346   1.5     skrll 		   input_section,
   3347  1.12  christos 		   (uint64_t) offset,
   3348   1.5     skrll 		   howto->name,
   3349   1.5     skrll 		   insn);
   3350   1.5     skrll 	    }
   3351   1.5     skrll 	  else if (r_type == R_PARISC_DPREL14F)
   3352   1.5     skrll 	    {
   3353   1.5     skrll 	      /* This must be a format 1 load/store.  Change the base
   3354   1.5     skrll 		 register to dp.  */
   3355   1.5     skrll 	      insn = (insn & 0xfc1ffff) | (27 << 21);
   3356   1.5     skrll 	    }
   3357   1.5     skrll 	}
   3358   1.5     skrll 
   3359   1.5     skrll       /* For all the DP relative relocations, we need to examine the symbol's
   3360   1.5     skrll 	 section.  If it has no section or if it's a code section, then
   3361   1.5     skrll 	 "data pointer relative" makes no sense.  In that case we don't
   3362   1.5     skrll 	 adjust the "value", and for 21 bit addil instructions, we change the
   3363   1.5     skrll 	 source addend register from %dp to %r0.  This situation commonly
   3364   1.5     skrll 	 arises for undefined weak symbols and when a variable's "constness"
   3365   1.5     skrll 	 is declared differently from the way the variable is defined.  For
   3366   1.5     skrll 	 instance: "extern int foo" with foo defined as "const int foo".  */
   3367   1.1     skrll       if (sym_sec == NULL || (sym_sec->flags & SEC_CODE) != 0)
   3368   1.1     skrll 	{
   3369   1.1     skrll 	  if ((insn & ((0x3f << 26) | (0x1f << 21)))
   3370   1.1     skrll 	      == (((int) OP_ADDIL << 26) | (27 << 21)))
   3371   1.1     skrll 	    {
   3372   1.1     skrll 	      insn &= ~ (0x1f << 21);
   3373   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3374   1.1     skrll 	  /* Now try to make things easy for the dynamic linker.  */
   3375   1.1     skrll 
   3376   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   3377   1.1     skrll 	}
   3378   1.1     skrll       /* Fall thru.  */
   3379   1.1     skrll 
   3380   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DLTIND21L:
   3381   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DLTIND14R:
   3382   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DLTIND14F:
   3383   1.4     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L:
   3384   1.5     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L:
   3385   1.5     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L:
   3386   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R:
   3387   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R:
   3388   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_IE14R:
   3389   1.1     skrll       value -= elf_gp (input_section->output_section->owner);
   3390   1.1     skrll       break;
   3391   1.1     skrll 
   3392   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_SEGREL32:
   3393   1.1     skrll       if ((sym_sec->flags & SEC_CODE) != 0)
   3394   1.1     skrll 	value -= htab->text_segment_base;
   3395   1.1     skrll       else
   3396   1.1     skrll 	value -= htab->data_segment_base;
   3397   1.1     skrll       break;
   3398   1.1     skrll 
   3399   1.1     skrll     default:
   3400   1.1     skrll       break;
   3401   1.1     skrll     }
   3402   1.1     skrll 
   3403   1.1     skrll   switch (r_type)
   3404   1.1     skrll     {
   3405   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR32:
   3406   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR14F:
   3407   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR17F:
   3408   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17C:
   3409   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL14F:
   3410   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL32:
   3411   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DPREL14F:
   3412   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PLABEL32:
   3413   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DLTIND14F:
   3414   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_SEGBASE:
   3415   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_SEGREL32:
   3416   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_DTPMOD32:
   3417   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_DTPOFF32:
   3418   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_TPREL32:
   3419   1.1     skrll       r_field = e_fsel;
   3420   1.1     skrll       break;
   3421   1.1     skrll 
   3422   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DLTIND21L:
   3423   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL21L:
   3424   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PLABEL21L:
   3425   1.1     skrll       r_field = e_lsel;
   3426   1.1     skrll       break;
   3427   1.1     skrll 
   3428   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR21L:
   3429   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DPREL21L:
   3430   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L:
   3431   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L:
   3432   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LDO21L:
   3433   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L:
   3434   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LE21L:
   3435   1.1     skrll       r_field = e_lrsel;
   3436   1.1     skrll       break;
   3437   1.1     skrll 
   3438   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17R:
   3439   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL14R:
   3440   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PLABEL14R:
   3441   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DLTIND14R:
   3442   1.1     skrll       r_field = e_rsel;
   3443   1.1     skrll       break;
   3444   1.1     skrll 
   3445   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR17R:
   3446   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR14R:
   3447   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DPREL14R:
   3448   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R:
   3449   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R:
   3450   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LDO14R:
   3451   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_IE14R:
   3452   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LE14R:
   3453   1.1     skrll       r_field = e_rrsel;
   3454   1.1     skrll       break;
   3455   1.1     skrll 
   3456   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL12F:
   3457   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17F:
   3458   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL22F:
   3459   1.1     skrll       r_field = e_fsel;
   3460   1.1     skrll 
   3461   1.1     skrll       if (r_type == (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL17F)
   3462   1.1     skrll 	{
   3463   1.1     skrll 	  max_branch_offset = (1 << (17-1)) << 2;
   3464   1.1     skrll 	}
   3465   1.1     skrll       else if (r_type == (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL12F)
   3466   1.1     skrll 	{
   3467   1.1     skrll 	  max_branch_offset = (1 << (12-1)) << 2;
   3468   1.1     skrll 	}
   3469   1.1     skrll       else
   3470   1.1     skrll 	{
   3471   1.1     skrll 	  max_branch_offset = (1 << (22-1)) << 2;
   3472   1.1     skrll 	}
   3473   1.1     skrll 
   3474   1.1     skrll       /* sym_sec is NULL on undefined weak syms or when shared on
   3475   1.1     skrll 	 undefined syms.  We've already checked for a stub for the
   3476   1.1     skrll 	 shared undefined case.  */
   3477   1.1     skrll       if (sym_sec == NULL)
   3478   1.1     skrll 	break;
   3479   1.1     skrll 
   3480   1.1     skrll       /* If the branch is out of reach, then redirect the
   3481   1.1     skrll 	 call to the local stub for this function.  */
   3482   1.1     skrll       if (value + addend + max_branch_offset >= 2*max_branch_offset)
   3483   1.1     skrll 	{
   3484   1.1     skrll 	  hsh = hppa_get_stub_entry (input_section, sym_sec,
   3485  1.12  christos 				     hh, rela, htab);
   3486   1.1     skrll 	  if (hsh == NULL)
   3487   1.1     skrll 	    return bfd_reloc_undefined;
   3488   1.1     skrll 
   3489   1.1     skrll 	  /* Munge up the value and addend so that we call the stub
   3490   1.1     skrll 	     rather than the procedure directly.  */
   3491   1.1     skrll 	  value = (hsh->stub_offset
   3492   1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->stub_sec->output_offset
   3493   1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->stub_sec->output_section->vma
   3494   1.1     skrll 		   - location);
   3495   1.1     skrll 	  addend = -8;
   3496   1.1     skrll 	}
   3497   1.1     skrll       break;
   3498   1.1     skrll 
   3499   1.1     skrll     /* Something we don't know how to handle.  */
   3500   1.1     skrll     default:
   3501   1.1     skrll       return bfd_reloc_notsupported;
   3502   1.1     skrll     }
   3503   1.1     skrll 
   3504   1.1     skrll   /* Make sure we can reach the stub.  */
   3505   1.1     skrll   if (max_branch_offset != 0
   3506   1.1     skrll       && value + addend + max_branch_offset >= 2*max_branch_offset)
   3507   1.1     skrll     {
   3508  1.11  christos       _bfd_error_handler
   3509  1.11  christos 	/* xgettext:c-format */
   3510  1.12  christos 	(_("%pB(%pA+%#" PRIx64 "): cannot reach %s, "
   3511  1.12  christos 	   "recompile with -ffunction-sections"),
   3512   1.1     skrll 	 input_bfd,
   3513   1.1     skrll 	 input_section,
   3514  1.12  christos 	 (uint64_t) offset,
   3515   1.1     skrll 	 hsh->bh_root.string);
   3516   1.1     skrll       bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   3517   1.1     skrll       return bfd_reloc_notsupported;
   3518   1.1     skrll     }
   3519   1.1     skrll 
   3520   1.1     skrll   val = hppa_field_adjust (value, addend, r_field);
   3521   1.1     skrll 
   3522   1.1     skrll   switch (r_type)
   3523   1.1     skrll     {
   3524   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL12F:
   3525   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17C:
   3526   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17F:
   3527   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17R:
   3528   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL22F:
   3529   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR17F:
   3530   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR17R:
   3531   1.1     skrll       /* This is a branch.  Divide the offset by four.
   3532   1.1     skrll 	 Note that we need to decide whether it's a branch or
   3533   1.1     skrll 	 otherwise by inspecting the reloc.  Inspecting insn won't
   3534   1.1     skrll 	 work as insn might be from a .word directive.  */
   3535   1.1     skrll       val >>= 2;
   3536   1.1     skrll       break;
   3537   1.1     skrll 
   3538   1.1     skrll     default:
   3539   1.1     skrll       break;
   3540   1.1     skrll     }
   3541   1.1     skrll 
   3542   1.1     skrll   insn = hppa_rebuild_insn (insn, val, r_format);
   3543   1.1     skrll 
   3544   1.1     skrll   /* Update the instruction word.  */
   3545   1.1     skrll   bfd_put_32 (input_bfd, (bfd_vma) insn, hit_data);
   3546   1.1     skrll   return bfd_reloc_ok;
   3547   1.1     skrll }
   3548   1.1     skrll 
   3549   1.1     skrll /* Relocate an HPPA ELF section.  */
   3550   1.1     skrll 
   3551   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   3552   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_relocate_section (bfd *output_bfd,
   3553   1.1     skrll 			     struct bfd_link_info *info,
   3554   1.1     skrll 			     bfd *input_bfd,
   3555   1.1     skrll 			     asection *input_section,
   3556   1.1     skrll 			     bfd_byte *contents,
   3557   1.1     skrll 			     Elf_Internal_Rela *relocs,
   3558   1.1     skrll 			     Elf_Internal_Sym *local_syms,
   3559   1.1     skrll 			     asection **local_sections)
   3560   1.1     skrll {
   3561   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma *local_got_offsets;
   3562   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   3563   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   3564   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Rela *rela;
   3565   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Rela *relend;
   3566   1.1     skrll 
   3567   1.1     skrll   symtab_hdr = &elf_tdata (input_bfd)->symtab_hdr;
   3568   1.1     skrll 
   3569   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   3570   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   3571   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   3572   1.3  christos 
   3573   1.1     skrll   local_got_offsets = elf_local_got_offsets (input_bfd);
   3574   1.1     skrll 
   3575   1.1     skrll   rela = relocs;
   3576   1.1     skrll   relend = relocs + input_section->reloc_count;
   3577   1.1     skrll   for (; rela < relend; rela++)
   3578   1.1     skrll     {
   3579   1.1     skrll       unsigned int r_type;
   3580   1.1     skrll       reloc_howto_type *howto;
   3581   1.1     skrll       unsigned int r_symndx;
   3582   1.1     skrll       struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   3583   1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Sym *sym;
   3584   1.1     skrll       asection *sym_sec;
   3585   1.1     skrll       bfd_vma relocation;
   3586   1.1     skrll       bfd_reloc_status_type rstatus;
   3587   1.1     skrll       const char *sym_name;
   3588   1.1     skrll       bfd_boolean plabel;
   3589   1.1     skrll       bfd_boolean warned_undef;
   3590   1.1     skrll 
   3591   1.1     skrll       r_type = ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info);
   3592   1.1     skrll       if (r_type >= (unsigned int) R_PARISC_UNIMPLEMENTED)
   3593   1.1     skrll 	{
   3594   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   3595   1.1     skrll 	  return FALSE;
   3596   1.1     skrll 	}
   3597   1.1     skrll       if (r_type == (unsigned int) R_PARISC_GNU_VTENTRY
   3598   1.1     skrll 	  || r_type == (unsigned int) R_PARISC_GNU_VTINHERIT)
   3599   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   3600   1.1     skrll 
   3601   1.1     skrll       r_symndx = ELF32_R_SYM (rela->r_info);
   3602   1.1     skrll       hh = NULL;
   3603   1.1     skrll       sym = NULL;
   3604   1.1     skrll       sym_sec = NULL;
   3605   1.1     skrll       warned_undef = FALSE;
   3606   1.1     skrll       if (r_symndx < symtab_hdr->sh_info)
   3607   1.1     skrll 	{
   3608   1.1     skrll 	  /* This is a local symbol, h defaults to NULL.  */
   3609   1.1     skrll 	  sym = local_syms + r_symndx;
   3610   1.1     skrll 	  sym_sec = local_sections[r_symndx];
   3611   1.1     skrll 	  relocation = _bfd_elf_rela_local_sym (output_bfd, sym, &sym_sec, rela);
   3612   1.1     skrll 	}
   3613   1.1     skrll       else
   3614   1.1     skrll 	{
   3615   1.1     skrll 	  struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh;
   3616   1.7  christos 	  bfd_boolean unresolved_reloc, ignored;
   3617   1.1     skrll 	  struct elf_link_hash_entry **sym_hashes = elf_sym_hashes (input_bfd);
   3618   1.1     skrll 
   3619   1.1     skrll 	  RELOC_FOR_GLOBAL_SYMBOL (info, input_bfd, input_section, rela,
   3620   1.1     skrll 				   r_symndx, symtab_hdr, sym_hashes,
   3621   1.1     skrll 				   eh, sym_sec, relocation,
   3622   1.7  christos 				   unresolved_reloc, warned_undef,
   3623   1.7  christos 				   ignored);
   3624   1.1     skrll 
   3625   1.7  christos 	  if (!bfd_link_relocatable (info)
   3626   1.1     skrll 	      && relocation == 0
   3627   1.1     skrll 	      && eh->root.type != bfd_link_hash_defined
   3628   1.1     skrll 	      && eh->root.type != bfd_link_hash_defweak
   3629   1.1     skrll 	      && eh->root.type != bfd_link_hash_undefweak)
   3630   1.1     skrll 	    {
   3631   1.1     skrll 	      if (info->unresolved_syms_in_objects == RM_IGNORE
   3632   1.1     skrll 		  && ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (eh->other) == STV_DEFAULT
   3633   1.1     skrll 		  && eh->type == STT_PARISC_MILLI)
   3634   1.1     skrll 		{
   3635  1.10  christos 		  (*info->callbacks->undefined_symbol)
   3636  1.10  christos 		    (info, eh_name (eh), input_bfd,
   3637  1.10  christos 		     input_section, rela->r_offset, FALSE);
   3638   1.1     skrll 		  warned_undef = TRUE;
   3639   1.1     skrll 		}
   3640   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3641   1.1     skrll 	  hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh);
   3642   1.1     skrll 	}
   3643   1.1     skrll 
   3644   1.6  christos       if (sym_sec != NULL && discarded_section (sym_sec))
   3645   1.3  christos 	RELOC_AGAINST_DISCARDED_SECTION (info, input_bfd, input_section,
   3646   1.6  christos 					 rela, 1, relend,
   3647   1.6  christos 					 elf_hppa_howto_table + r_type, 0,
   3648   1.3  christos 					 contents);
   3649   1.1     skrll 
   3650   1.7  christos       if (bfd_link_relocatable (info))
   3651   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   3652   1.1     skrll 
   3653   1.1     skrll       /* Do any required modifications to the relocation value, and
   3654   1.1     skrll 	 determine what types of dynamic info we need to output, if
   3655   1.1     skrll 	 any.  */
   3656   1.1     skrll       plabel = 0;
   3657   1.1     skrll       switch (r_type)
   3658   1.1     skrll 	{
   3659   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND14F:
   3660   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND14R:
   3661   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND21L:
   3662   1.1     skrll 	  {
   3663   1.1     skrll 	    bfd_vma off;
   3664  1.11  christos 	    bfd_boolean do_got = FALSE;
   3665  1.11  christos 	    bfd_boolean reloc = bfd_link_pic (info);
   3666   1.1     skrll 
   3667   1.1     skrll 	    /* Relocation is to the entry for this symbol in the
   3668   1.1     skrll 	       global offset table.  */
   3669   1.1     skrll 	    if (hh != NULL)
   3670   1.1     skrll 	      {
   3671   1.1     skrll 		bfd_boolean dyn;
   3672   1.1     skrll 
   3673   1.1     skrll 		off = hh->eh.got.offset;
   3674   1.1     skrll 		dyn = htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created;
   3675  1.11  christos 		reloc = (!UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, &hh->eh)
   3676  1.11  christos 			 && (reloc
   3677  1.11  christos 			     || (hh->eh.dynindx != -1
   3678  1.11  christos 				 && !SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, &hh->eh))));
   3679  1.11  christos 		if (!reloc
   3680  1.11  christos 		    || !WILL_CALL_FINISH_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL (dyn,
   3681  1.11  christos 							 bfd_link_pic (info),
   3682  1.11  christos 							 &hh->eh))
   3683   1.1     skrll 		  {
   3684   1.1     skrll 		    /* If we aren't going to call finish_dynamic_symbol,
   3685   1.1     skrll 		       then we need to handle initialisation of the .got
   3686   1.1     skrll 		       entry and create needed relocs here.  Since the
   3687   1.1     skrll 		       offset must always be a multiple of 4, we use the
   3688   1.1     skrll 		       least significant bit to record whether we have
   3689   1.1     skrll 		       initialised it already.  */
   3690   1.1     skrll 		    if ((off & 1) != 0)
   3691   1.1     skrll 		      off &= ~1;
   3692   1.1     skrll 		    else
   3693   1.1     skrll 		      {
   3694   1.1     skrll 			hh->eh.got.offset |= 1;
   3695  1.11  christos 			do_got = TRUE;
   3696   1.1     skrll 		      }
   3697   1.1     skrll 		  }
   3698   1.1     skrll 	      }
   3699   1.1     skrll 	    else
   3700   1.1     skrll 	      {
   3701   1.1     skrll 		/* Local symbol case.  */
   3702   1.1     skrll 		if (local_got_offsets == NULL)
   3703   1.1     skrll 		  abort ();
   3704   1.1     skrll 
   3705   1.1     skrll 		off = local_got_offsets[r_symndx];
   3706   1.1     skrll 
   3707   1.1     skrll 		/* The offset must always be a multiple of 4.  We use
   3708   1.1     skrll 		   the least significant bit to record whether we have
   3709   1.1     skrll 		   already generated the necessary reloc.  */
   3710   1.1     skrll 		if ((off & 1) != 0)
   3711   1.1     skrll 		  off &= ~1;
   3712   1.1     skrll 		else
   3713   1.1     skrll 		  {
   3714   1.1     skrll 		    local_got_offsets[r_symndx] |= 1;
   3715  1.11  christos 		    do_got = TRUE;
   3716   1.1     skrll 		  }
   3717   1.1     skrll 	      }
   3718   1.1     skrll 
   3719   1.1     skrll 	    if (do_got)
   3720   1.1     skrll 	      {
   3721  1.11  christos 		if (reloc)
   3722   1.1     skrll 		  {
   3723   1.1     skrll 		    /* Output a dynamic relocation for this GOT entry.
   3724   1.1     skrll 		       In this case it is relative to the base of the
   3725   1.1     skrll 		       object because the symbol index is zero.  */
   3726   1.1     skrll 		    Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   3727   1.1     skrll 		    bfd_byte *loc;
   3728  1.11  christos 		    asection *sec = htab->etab.srelgot;
   3729   1.1     skrll 
   3730   1.1     skrll 		    outrel.r_offset = (off
   3731  1.11  christos 				       + htab->etab.sgot->output_offset
   3732  1.11  christos 				       + htab->etab.sgot->output_section->vma);
   3733   1.1     skrll 		    outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (0, R_PARISC_DIR32);
   3734   1.1     skrll 		    outrel.r_addend = relocation;
   3735   1.1     skrll 		    loc = sec->contents;
   3736   1.1     skrll 		    loc += sec->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   3737   1.1     skrll 		    bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   3738   1.1     skrll 		  }
   3739   1.1     skrll 		else
   3740   1.1     skrll 		  bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, relocation,
   3741  1.11  christos 			      htab->etab.sgot->contents + off);
   3742   1.1     skrll 	      }
   3743   1.1     skrll 
   3744   1.1     skrll 	    if (off >= (bfd_vma) -2)
   3745   1.1     skrll 	      abort ();
   3746   1.1     skrll 
   3747   1.1     skrll 	    /* Add the base of the GOT to the relocation value.  */
   3748   1.1     skrll 	    relocation = (off
   3749  1.11  christos 			  + htab->etab.sgot->output_offset
   3750  1.11  christos 			  + htab->etab.sgot->output_section->vma);
   3751   1.1     skrll 	  }
   3752   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   3753   1.1     skrll 
   3754   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_SEGREL32:
   3755   1.1     skrll 	  /* If this is the first SEGREL relocation, then initialize
   3756   1.1     skrll 	     the segment base values.  */
   3757   1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->text_segment_base == (bfd_vma) -1)
   3758   1.1     skrll 	    bfd_map_over_sections (output_bfd, hppa_record_segment_addr, htab);
   3759   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   3760   1.1     skrll 
   3761   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL14R:
   3762   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL21L:
   3763   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL32:
   3764   1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created)
   3765   1.1     skrll 	    {
   3766   1.1     skrll 	      bfd_vma off;
   3767   1.1     skrll 	      bfd_boolean do_plt = 0;
   3768   1.1     skrll 	      /* If we have a global symbol with a PLT slot, then
   3769   1.1     skrll 		 redirect this relocation to it.  */
   3770   1.1     skrll 	      if (hh != NULL)
   3771   1.1     skrll 		{
   3772   1.1     skrll 		  off = hh->eh.plt.offset;
   3773   1.7  christos 		  if (! WILL_CALL_FINISH_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL (1,
   3774   1.7  christos 							 bfd_link_pic (info),
   3775   1.1     skrll 							 &hh->eh))
   3776   1.1     skrll 		    {
   3777  1.11  christos 		      /* In a non-shared link, adjust_dynamic_symbol
   3778   1.1     skrll 			 isn't called for symbols forced local.  We
   3779   1.1     skrll 			 need to write out the plt entry here.  */
   3780   1.1     skrll 		      if ((off & 1) != 0)
   3781   1.1     skrll 			off &= ~1;
   3782   1.1     skrll 		      else
   3783   1.1     skrll 			{
   3784   1.1     skrll 			  hh->eh.plt.offset |= 1;
   3785   1.1     skrll 			  do_plt = 1;
   3786   1.1     skrll 			}
   3787   1.1     skrll 		    }
   3788   1.1     skrll 		}
   3789   1.1     skrll 	      else
   3790   1.1     skrll 		{
   3791   1.1     skrll 		  bfd_vma *local_plt_offsets;
   3792   1.1     skrll 
   3793   1.1     skrll 		  if (local_got_offsets == NULL)
   3794   1.1     skrll 		    abort ();
   3795   1.1     skrll 
   3796   1.1     skrll 		  local_plt_offsets = local_got_offsets + symtab_hdr->sh_info;
   3797   1.1     skrll 		  off = local_plt_offsets[r_symndx];
   3798   1.1     skrll 
   3799   1.1     skrll 		  /* As for the local .got entry case, we use the last
   3800   1.1     skrll 		     bit to record whether we've already initialised
   3801   1.1     skrll 		     this local .plt entry.  */
   3802   1.1     skrll 		  if ((off & 1) != 0)
   3803   1.1     skrll 		    off &= ~1;
   3804   1.1     skrll 		  else
   3805   1.1     skrll 		    {
   3806   1.1     skrll 		      local_plt_offsets[r_symndx] |= 1;
   3807   1.1     skrll 		      do_plt = 1;
   3808   1.1     skrll 		    }
   3809   1.1     skrll 		}
   3810   1.1     skrll 
   3811   1.1     skrll 	      if (do_plt)
   3812   1.1     skrll 		{
   3813   1.7  christos 		  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   3814   1.1     skrll 		    {
   3815   1.1     skrll 		      /* Output a dynamic IPLT relocation for this
   3816   1.1     skrll 			 PLT entry.  */
   3817   1.1     skrll 		      Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   3818   1.1     skrll 		      bfd_byte *loc;
   3819  1.11  christos 		      asection *s = htab->etab.srelplt;
   3820   1.1     skrll 
   3821   1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_offset = (off
   3822  1.11  christos 					 + htab->etab.splt->output_offset
   3823  1.11  christos 					 + htab->etab.splt->output_section->vma);
   3824   1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (0, R_PARISC_IPLT);
   3825   1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_addend = relocation;
   3826   1.1     skrll 		      loc = s->contents;
   3827   1.1     skrll 		      loc += s->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   3828   1.1     skrll 		      bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   3829   1.1     skrll 		    }
   3830   1.1     skrll 		  else
   3831   1.1     skrll 		    {
   3832   1.1     skrll 		      bfd_put_32 (output_bfd,
   3833   1.1     skrll 				  relocation,
   3834  1.11  christos 				  htab->etab.splt->contents + off);
   3835   1.1     skrll 		      bfd_put_32 (output_bfd,
   3836  1.11  christos 				  elf_gp (htab->etab.splt->output_section->owner),
   3837  1.11  christos 				  htab->etab.splt->contents + off + 4);
   3838   1.1     skrll 		    }
   3839   1.1     skrll 		}
   3840   1.1     skrll 
   3841   1.1     skrll 	      if (off >= (bfd_vma) -2)
   3842   1.1     skrll 		abort ();
   3843   1.1     skrll 
   3844   1.1     skrll 	      /* PLABELs contain function pointers.  Relocation is to
   3845   1.1     skrll 		 the entry for the function in the .plt.  The magic +2
   3846   1.1     skrll 		 offset signals to $$dyncall that the function pointer
   3847   1.1     skrll 		 is in the .plt and thus has a gp pointer too.
   3848   1.1     skrll 		 Exception:  Undefined PLABELs should have a value of
   3849   1.1     skrll 		 zero.  */
   3850   1.1     skrll 	      if (hh == NULL
   3851   1.1     skrll 		  || (hh->eh.root.type != bfd_link_hash_undefweak
   3852   1.1     skrll 		      && hh->eh.root.type != bfd_link_hash_undefined))
   3853   1.1     skrll 		{
   3854   1.1     skrll 		  relocation = (off
   3855  1.11  christos 				+ htab->etab.splt->output_offset
   3856  1.11  christos 				+ htab->etab.splt->output_section->vma
   3857   1.1     skrll 				+ 2);
   3858   1.1     skrll 		}
   3859   1.1     skrll 	      plabel = 1;
   3860   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3861  1.11  christos 	  /* Fall through.  */
   3862   1.1     skrll 
   3863   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR17F:
   3864   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR17R:
   3865   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR14F:
   3866   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR14R:
   3867   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR21L:
   3868   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DPREL14F:
   3869   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DPREL14R:
   3870   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DPREL21L:
   3871   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR32:
   3872   1.1     skrll 	  if ((input_section->flags & SEC_ALLOC) == 0)
   3873   1.1     skrll 	    break;
   3874   1.1     skrll 
   3875  1.11  christos 	  if (bfd_link_pic (info)
   3876  1.11  christos 	      ? ((hh == NULL
   3877  1.11  christos 		  || hh->dyn_relocs != NULL)
   3878  1.11  christos 		 && ((hh != NULL && pc_dynrelocs (hh))
   3879  1.11  christos 		     || IS_ABSOLUTE_RELOC (r_type)))
   3880  1.11  christos 	      : (hh != NULL
   3881  1.11  christos 		 && hh->dyn_relocs != NULL))
   3882   1.1     skrll 	    {
   3883   1.1     skrll 	      Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   3884   1.1     skrll 	      bfd_boolean skip;
   3885   1.1     skrll 	      asection *sreloc;
   3886   1.1     skrll 	      bfd_byte *loc;
   3887   1.1     skrll 
   3888   1.1     skrll 	      /* When generating a shared object, these relocations
   3889   1.1     skrll 		 are copied into the output file to be resolved at run
   3890   1.1     skrll 		 time.  */
   3891   1.1     skrll 
   3892   1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_addend = rela->r_addend;
   3893   1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_offset =
   3894   1.1     skrll 		_bfd_elf_section_offset (output_bfd, info, input_section,
   3895   1.1     skrll 					 rela->r_offset);
   3896   1.1     skrll 	      skip = (outrel.r_offset == (bfd_vma) -1
   3897   1.1     skrll 		      || outrel.r_offset == (bfd_vma) -2);
   3898   1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_offset += (input_section->output_offset
   3899   1.1     skrll 				  + input_section->output_section->vma);
   3900   1.7  christos 
   3901   1.1     skrll 	      if (skip)
   3902   1.1     skrll 		{
   3903   1.1     skrll 		  memset (&outrel, 0, sizeof (outrel));
   3904   1.1     skrll 		}
   3905   1.1     skrll 	      else if (hh != NULL
   3906   1.1     skrll 		       && hh->eh.dynindx != -1
   3907   1.1     skrll 		       && (plabel
   3908   1.1     skrll 			   || !IS_ABSOLUTE_RELOC (r_type)
   3909   1.7  christos 			   || !bfd_link_pic (info)
   3910   1.7  christos 			   || !SYMBOLIC_BIND (info, &hh->eh)
   3911   1.1     skrll 			   || !hh->eh.def_regular))
   3912   1.1     skrll 		{
   3913   1.1     skrll 		  outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (hh->eh.dynindx, r_type);
   3914   1.1     skrll 		}
   3915   1.1     skrll 	      else /* It's a local symbol, or one marked to become local.  */
   3916   1.1     skrll 		{
   3917   1.1     skrll 		  int indx = 0;
   3918   1.1     skrll 
   3919   1.1     skrll 		  /* Add the absolute offset of the symbol.  */
   3920   1.1     skrll 		  outrel.r_addend += relocation;
   3921   1.1     skrll 
   3922   1.1     skrll 		  /* Global plabels need to be processed by the
   3923   1.1     skrll 		     dynamic linker so that functions have at most one
   3924   1.1     skrll 		     fptr.  For this reason, we need to differentiate
   3925   1.1     skrll 		     between global and local plabels, which we do by
   3926   1.1     skrll 		     providing the function symbol for a global plabel
   3927   1.1     skrll 		     reloc, and no symbol for local plabels.  */
   3928   1.1     skrll 		  if (! plabel
   3929   1.1     skrll 		      && sym_sec != NULL
   3930   1.1     skrll 		      && sym_sec->output_section != NULL
   3931   1.1     skrll 		      && ! bfd_is_abs_section (sym_sec))
   3932   1.1     skrll 		    {
   3933   1.1     skrll 		      asection *osec;
   3934   1.1     skrll 
   3935   1.1     skrll 		      osec = sym_sec->output_section;
   3936   1.1     skrll 		      indx = elf_section_data (osec)->dynindx;
   3937   1.1     skrll 		      if (indx == 0)
   3938   1.1     skrll 			{
   3939   1.1     skrll 			  osec = htab->etab.text_index_section;
   3940   1.1     skrll 			  indx = elf_section_data (osec)->dynindx;
   3941   1.1     skrll 			}
   3942   1.1     skrll 		      BFD_ASSERT (indx != 0);
   3943   1.1     skrll 
   3944   1.1     skrll 		      /* We are turning this relocation into one
   3945   1.1     skrll 			 against a section symbol, so subtract out the
   3946   1.1     skrll 			 output section's address but not the offset
   3947   1.1     skrll 			 of the input section in the output section.  */
   3948   1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_addend -= osec->vma;
   3949   1.1     skrll 		    }
   3950   1.1     skrll 
   3951   1.1     skrll 		  outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (indx, r_type);
   3952   1.1     skrll 		}
   3953   1.1     skrll 	      sreloc = elf_section_data (input_section)->sreloc;
   3954   1.1     skrll 	      if (sreloc == NULL)
   3955   1.1     skrll 		abort ();
   3956   1.1     skrll 
   3957   1.1     skrll 	      loc = sreloc->contents;
   3958   1.1     skrll 	      loc += sreloc->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   3959   1.1     skrll 	      bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   3960   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3961   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   3962   1.7  christos 
   3963   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L:
   3964   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R:
   3965   1.1     skrll 	  {
   3966   1.1     skrll 	    bfd_vma off;
   3967   1.7  christos 
   3968   1.1     skrll 	    off = htab->tls_ldm_got.offset;
   3969   1.1     skrll 	    if (off & 1)
   3970   1.1     skrll 	      off &= ~1;
   3971   1.1     skrll 	    else
   3972   1.1     skrll 	      {
   3973   1.1     skrll 		Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   3974   1.1     skrll 		bfd_byte *loc;
   3975   1.1     skrll 
   3976   1.7  christos 		outrel.r_offset = (off
   3977  1.11  christos 				   + htab->etab.sgot->output_section->vma
   3978  1.11  christos 				   + htab->etab.sgot->output_offset);
   3979   1.1     skrll 		outrel.r_addend = 0;
   3980   1.1     skrll 		outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (0, R_PARISC_TLS_DTPMOD32);
   3981  1.11  christos 		loc = htab->etab.srelgot->contents;
   3982  1.11  christos 		loc += htab->etab.srelgot->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   3983   1.1     skrll 
   3984   1.1     skrll 		bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   3985   1.1     skrll 		htab->tls_ldm_got.offset |= 1;
   3986   1.1     skrll 	      }
   3987   1.1     skrll 
   3988   1.1     skrll 	    /* Add the base of the GOT to the relocation value.  */
   3989   1.1     skrll 	    relocation = (off
   3990  1.11  christos 			  + htab->etab.sgot->output_offset
   3991  1.11  christos 			  + htab->etab.sgot->output_section->vma);
   3992   1.1     skrll 
   3993   1.1     skrll 	    break;
   3994   1.1     skrll 	  }
   3995   1.1     skrll 
   3996   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDO21L:
   3997   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDO14R:
   3998   1.1     skrll 	  relocation -= dtpoff_base (info);
   3999   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   4000   1.1     skrll 
   4001   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L:
   4002   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R:
   4003   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L:
   4004   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_IE14R:
   4005   1.1     skrll 	  {
   4006   1.1     skrll 	    bfd_vma off;
   4007   1.1     skrll 	    int indx;
   4008   1.1     skrll 	    char tls_type;
   4009   1.1     skrll 
   4010   1.1     skrll 	    indx = 0;
   4011   1.1     skrll 	    if (hh != NULL)
   4012   1.1     skrll 	      {
   4013  1.11  christos 		if (!htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created
   4014  1.11  christos 		    || hh->eh.dynindx == -1
   4015  1.11  christos 		    || SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, &hh->eh)
   4016  1.11  christos 		    || UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, &hh->eh))
   4017  1.11  christos 		  /* This is actually a static link, or it is a
   4018  1.11  christos 		     -Bsymbolic link and the symbol is defined
   4019  1.11  christos 		     locally, or the symbol was forced to be local
   4020  1.11  christos 		     because of a version file.  */
   4021  1.11  christos 		  ;
   4022  1.11  christos 		else
   4023  1.11  christos 		  indx = hh->eh.dynindx;
   4024   1.1     skrll 		off = hh->eh.got.offset;
   4025   1.1     skrll 		tls_type = hh->tls_type;
   4026   1.1     skrll 	      }
   4027   1.1     skrll 	    else
   4028   1.1     skrll 	      {
   4029   1.1     skrll 		off = local_got_offsets[r_symndx];
   4030   1.1     skrll 		tls_type = hppa_elf_local_got_tls_type (input_bfd)[r_symndx];
   4031   1.1     skrll 	      }
   4032   1.1     skrll 
   4033   1.1     skrll 	    if (tls_type == GOT_UNKNOWN)
   4034   1.1     skrll 	      abort ();
   4035   1.1     skrll 
   4036   1.1     skrll 	    if ((off & 1) != 0)
   4037   1.1     skrll 	      off &= ~1;
   4038   1.1     skrll 	    else
   4039   1.1     skrll 	      {
   4040   1.1     skrll 		bfd_boolean need_relocs = FALSE;
   4041   1.1     skrll 		Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   4042   1.1     skrll 		bfd_byte *loc = NULL;
   4043   1.1     skrll 		int cur_off = off;
   4044   1.1     skrll 
   4045  1.11  christos 		/* The GOT entries have not been initialized yet.  Do it
   4046  1.11  christos 		   now, and emit any relocations.  If both an IE GOT and a
   4047  1.11  christos 		   GD GOT are necessary, we emit the GD first.  */
   4048  1.11  christos 
   4049  1.11  christos 		if (indx != 0
   4050  1.12  christos 		    || (bfd_link_dll (info)
   4051  1.11  christos 			&& (hh == NULL
   4052  1.11  christos 			    || !UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, &hh->eh))))
   4053   1.1     skrll 		  {
   4054   1.1     skrll 		    need_relocs = TRUE;
   4055  1.11  christos 		    loc = htab->etab.srelgot->contents;
   4056  1.11  christos 		    loc += (htab->etab.srelgot->reloc_count
   4057  1.11  christos 			    * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela));
   4058   1.1     skrll 		  }
   4059   1.1     skrll 
   4060   1.1     skrll 		if (tls_type & GOT_TLS_GD)
   4061   1.1     skrll 		  {
   4062   1.1     skrll 		    if (need_relocs)
   4063   1.1     skrll 		      {
   4064  1.11  christos 			outrel.r_offset
   4065  1.11  christos 			  = (cur_off
   4066  1.11  christos 			     + htab->etab.sgot->output_section->vma
   4067  1.11  christos 			     + htab->etab.sgot->output_offset);
   4068  1.11  christos 			outrel.r_info
   4069  1.11  christos 			  = ELF32_R_INFO (indx, R_PARISC_TLS_DTPMOD32);
   4070   1.1     skrll 			outrel.r_addend = 0;
   4071   1.1     skrll 			bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   4072  1.11  christos 			htab->etab.srelgot->reloc_count++;
   4073   1.1     skrll 			loc += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   4074  1.12  christos 			bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 0,
   4075  1.12  christos 				    htab->etab.sgot->contents + cur_off);
   4076  1.12  christos 		      }
   4077  1.12  christos 		    else
   4078  1.12  christos 		      /* If we are not emitting relocations for a
   4079  1.12  christos 			 general dynamic reference, then we must be in a
   4080  1.12  christos 			 static link or an executable link with the
   4081  1.12  christos 			 symbol binding locally.  Mark it as belonging
   4082  1.12  christos 			 to module 1, the executable.  */
   4083  1.12  christos 		      bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 1,
   4084  1.12  christos 				  htab->etab.sgot->contents + cur_off);
   4085  1.12  christos 
   4086  1.12  christos 		    if (indx != 0)
   4087  1.12  christos 		      {
   4088  1.11  christos 			outrel.r_info
   4089  1.11  christos 			  = ELF32_R_INFO (indx, R_PARISC_TLS_DTPOFF32);
   4090  1.11  christos 			outrel.r_offset += 4;
   4091  1.11  christos 			bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   4092  1.11  christos 			htab->etab.srelgot->reloc_count++;
   4093  1.11  christos 			loc += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   4094  1.11  christos 			bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 0,
   4095  1.11  christos 				    htab->etab.sgot->contents + cur_off + 4);
   4096   1.1     skrll 		      }
   4097   1.1     skrll 		    else
   4098  1.12  christos 		      bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, relocation - dtpoff_base (info),
   4099  1.12  christos 				  htab->etab.sgot->contents + cur_off + 4);
   4100   1.1     skrll 		    cur_off += 8;
   4101   1.1     skrll 		  }
   4102   1.1     skrll 
   4103   1.1     skrll 		if (tls_type & GOT_TLS_IE)
   4104   1.1     skrll 		  {
   4105  1.11  christos 		    if (need_relocs
   4106  1.11  christos 			&& !(bfd_link_executable (info)
   4107  1.11  christos 			     && SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, &hh->eh)))
   4108   1.1     skrll 		      {
   4109  1.11  christos 			outrel.r_offset
   4110  1.11  christos 			  = (cur_off
   4111  1.11  christos 			     + htab->etab.sgot->output_section->vma
   4112  1.11  christos 			     + htab->etab.sgot->output_offset);
   4113  1.11  christos 			outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (indx,
   4114  1.11  christos 						      R_PARISC_TLS_TPREL32);
   4115   1.1     skrll 			if (indx == 0)
   4116   1.1     skrll 			  outrel.r_addend = relocation - dtpoff_base (info);
   4117   1.1     skrll 			else
   4118   1.1     skrll 			  outrel.r_addend = 0;
   4119   1.1     skrll 			bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   4120  1.11  christos 			htab->etab.srelgot->reloc_count++;
   4121   1.1     skrll 			loc += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   4122   1.1     skrll 		      }
   4123   1.1     skrll 		    else
   4124   1.1     skrll 		      bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, tpoff (info, relocation),
   4125  1.11  christos 				  htab->etab.sgot->contents + cur_off);
   4126   1.1     skrll 		    cur_off += 4;
   4127   1.1     skrll 		  }
   4128   1.1     skrll 
   4129   1.1     skrll 		if (hh != NULL)
   4130   1.1     skrll 		  hh->eh.got.offset |= 1;
   4131   1.1     skrll 		else
   4132   1.1     skrll 		  local_got_offsets[r_symndx] |= 1;
   4133   1.1     skrll 	      }
   4134   1.1     skrll 
   4135  1.11  christos 	    if ((tls_type & GOT_NORMAL) != 0
   4136  1.11  christos 		&& (tls_type & (GOT_TLS_GD | GOT_TLS_LDM | GOT_TLS_IE)) != 0)
   4137  1.11  christos 	      {
   4138  1.11  christos 		if (hh != NULL)
   4139  1.11  christos 		  _bfd_error_handler (_("%s has both normal and TLS relocs"),
   4140  1.11  christos 				      hh_name (hh));
   4141  1.11  christos 		else
   4142  1.11  christos 		  {
   4143  1.11  christos 		    Elf_Internal_Sym *isym
   4144  1.11  christos 		      = bfd_sym_from_r_symndx (&htab->sym_cache,
   4145  1.11  christos 					       input_bfd, r_symndx);
   4146  1.11  christos 		    if (isym == NULL)
   4147  1.11  christos 		      return FALSE;
   4148  1.11  christos 		    sym_name
   4149  1.11  christos 		      = bfd_elf_string_from_elf_section (input_bfd,
   4150  1.11  christos 							 symtab_hdr->sh_link,
   4151  1.11  christos 							 isym->st_name);
   4152  1.11  christos 		    if (sym_name == NULL)
   4153  1.11  christos 		      return FALSE;
   4154  1.11  christos 		    if (*sym_name == '\0')
   4155  1.11  christos 		      sym_name = bfd_section_name (input_bfd, sym_sec);
   4156  1.11  christos 		    _bfd_error_handler
   4157  1.12  christos 		      (_("%pB:%s has both normal and TLS relocs"),
   4158  1.11  christos 		       input_bfd, sym_name);
   4159  1.11  christos 		  }
   4160  1.11  christos 		bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   4161  1.11  christos 		return FALSE;
   4162  1.11  christos 	      }
   4163  1.11  christos 
   4164   1.1     skrll 	    if ((tls_type & GOT_TLS_GD)
   4165  1.11  christos 		&& r_type != R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L
   4166  1.11  christos 		&& r_type != R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R)
   4167   1.1     skrll 	      off += 2 * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   4168   1.1     skrll 
   4169   1.1     skrll 	    /* Add the base of the GOT to the relocation value.  */
   4170   1.1     skrll 	    relocation = (off
   4171  1.11  christos 			  + htab->etab.sgot->output_offset
   4172  1.11  christos 			  + htab->etab.sgot->output_section->vma);
   4173   1.1     skrll 
   4174   1.1     skrll 	    break;
   4175   1.1     skrll 	  }
   4176   1.1     skrll 
   4177   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LE21L:
   4178   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LE14R:
   4179   1.1     skrll 	  {
   4180   1.1     skrll 	    relocation = tpoff (info, relocation);
   4181   1.1     skrll 	    break;
   4182   1.1     skrll 	  }
   4183   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   4184   1.1     skrll 
   4185   1.1     skrll 	default:
   4186   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   4187   1.1     skrll 	}
   4188   1.1     skrll 
   4189   1.1     skrll       rstatus = final_link_relocate (input_section, contents, rela, relocation,
   4190   1.1     skrll 			       htab, sym_sec, hh, info);
   4191   1.1     skrll 
   4192   1.1     skrll       if (rstatus == bfd_reloc_ok)
   4193   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   4194   1.1     skrll 
   4195   1.1     skrll       if (hh != NULL)
   4196   1.1     skrll 	sym_name = hh_name (hh);
   4197   1.1     skrll       else
   4198   1.1     skrll 	{
   4199   1.1     skrll 	  sym_name = bfd_elf_string_from_elf_section (input_bfd,
   4200   1.1     skrll 						      symtab_hdr->sh_link,
   4201   1.1     skrll 						      sym->st_name);
   4202   1.1     skrll 	  if (sym_name == NULL)
   4203   1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   4204   1.1     skrll 	  if (*sym_name == '\0')
   4205   1.1     skrll 	    sym_name = bfd_section_name (input_bfd, sym_sec);
   4206   1.1     skrll 	}
   4207   1.1     skrll 
   4208   1.1     skrll       howto = elf_hppa_howto_table + r_type;
   4209   1.1     skrll 
   4210   1.1     skrll       if (rstatus == bfd_reloc_undefined || rstatus == bfd_reloc_notsupported)
   4211   1.1     skrll 	{
   4212   1.1     skrll 	  if (rstatus == bfd_reloc_notsupported || !warned_undef)
   4213   1.1     skrll 	    {
   4214  1.11  christos 	      _bfd_error_handler
   4215  1.11  christos 		/* xgettext:c-format */
   4216  1.12  christos 		(_("%pB(%pA+%#" PRIx64 "): cannot handle %s for %s"),
   4217   1.1     skrll 		 input_bfd,
   4218   1.1     skrll 		 input_section,
   4219  1.12  christos 		 (uint64_t) rela->r_offset,
   4220   1.1     skrll 		 howto->name,
   4221   1.1     skrll 		 sym_name);
   4222   1.1     skrll 	      bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   4223   1.1     skrll 	      return FALSE;
   4224   1.1     skrll 	    }
   4225   1.1     skrll 	}
   4226   1.1     skrll       else
   4227  1.10  christos 	(*info->callbacks->reloc_overflow)
   4228  1.10  christos 	  (info, (hh ? &hh->eh.root : NULL), sym_name, howto->name,
   4229  1.10  christos 	   (bfd_vma) 0, input_bfd, input_section, rela->r_offset);
   4230   1.1     skrll     }
   4231   1.1     skrll 
   4232   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   4233   1.1     skrll }
   4234   1.1     skrll 
   4235   1.1     skrll /* Finish up dynamic symbol handling.  We set the contents of various
   4236   1.1     skrll    dynamic sections here.  */
   4237   1.1     skrll 
   4238   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   4239   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_finish_dynamic_symbol (bfd *output_bfd,
   4240   1.1     skrll 				  struct bfd_link_info *info,
   4241   1.1     skrll 				  struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh,
   4242   1.1     skrll 				  Elf_Internal_Sym *sym)
   4243   1.1     skrll {
   4244   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   4245   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Rela rela;
   4246   1.1     skrll   bfd_byte *loc;
   4247   1.1     skrll 
   4248   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   4249   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   4250   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   4251   1.1     skrll 
   4252   1.1     skrll   if (eh->plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1)
   4253   1.1     skrll     {
   4254   1.1     skrll       bfd_vma value;
   4255   1.1     skrll 
   4256   1.1     skrll       if (eh->plt.offset & 1)
   4257   1.1     skrll 	abort ();
   4258   1.1     skrll 
   4259   1.1     skrll       /* This symbol has an entry in the procedure linkage table.  Set
   4260   1.1     skrll 	 it up.
   4261   1.1     skrll 
   4262   1.1     skrll 	 The format of a plt entry is
   4263   1.1     skrll 	 <funcaddr>
   4264   1.1     skrll 	 <__gp>
   4265   1.1     skrll       */
   4266   1.1     skrll       value = 0;
   4267   1.1     skrll       if (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defined
   4268   1.1     skrll 	  || eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak)
   4269   1.1     skrll 	{
   4270   1.1     skrll 	  value = eh->root.u.def.value;
   4271   1.1     skrll 	  if (eh->root.u.def.section->output_section != NULL)
   4272   1.1     skrll 	    value += (eh->root.u.def.section->output_offset
   4273   1.1     skrll 		      + eh->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma);
   4274   1.1     skrll 	}
   4275   1.1     skrll 
   4276   1.1     skrll       /* Create a dynamic IPLT relocation for this entry.  */
   4277   1.1     skrll       rela.r_offset = (eh->plt.offset
   4278  1.11  christos 		      + htab->etab.splt->output_offset
   4279  1.11  christos 		      + htab->etab.splt->output_section->vma);
   4280   1.1     skrll       if (eh->dynindx != -1)
   4281   1.1     skrll 	{
   4282   1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (eh->dynindx, R_PARISC_IPLT);
   4283   1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_addend = 0;
   4284   1.1     skrll 	}
   4285   1.1     skrll       else
   4286   1.1     skrll 	{
   4287   1.1     skrll 	  /* This symbol has been marked to become local, and is
   4288   1.1     skrll 	     used by a plabel so must be kept in the .plt.  */
   4289   1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (0, R_PARISC_IPLT);
   4290   1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_addend = value;
   4291   1.1     skrll 	}
   4292   1.1     skrll 
   4293  1.11  christos       loc = htab->etab.srelplt->contents;
   4294  1.11  christos       loc += htab->etab.srelplt->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   4295  1.11  christos       bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (htab->etab.splt->output_section->owner, &rela, loc);
   4296   1.1     skrll 
   4297   1.1     skrll       if (!eh->def_regular)
   4298   1.1     skrll 	{
   4299   1.1     skrll 	  /* Mark the symbol as undefined, rather than as defined in
   4300   1.1     skrll 	     the .plt section.  Leave the value alone.  */
   4301   1.1     skrll 	  sym->st_shndx = SHN_UNDEF;
   4302   1.1     skrll 	}
   4303   1.1     skrll     }
   4304   1.1     skrll 
   4305   1.1     skrll   if (eh->got.offset != (bfd_vma) -1
   4306  1.11  christos       && (hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh)->tls_type & GOT_NORMAL) != 0
   4307  1.11  christos       && !UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, eh))
   4308   1.1     skrll     {
   4309  1.11  christos       bfd_boolean is_dyn = (eh->dynindx != -1
   4310  1.11  christos 			    && !SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, eh));
   4311   1.1     skrll 
   4312  1.11  christos       if (is_dyn || bfd_link_pic (info))
   4313   1.1     skrll 	{
   4314  1.11  christos 	  /* This symbol has an entry in the global offset table.  Set
   4315  1.11  christos 	     it up.  */
   4316  1.11  christos 
   4317  1.11  christos 	  rela.r_offset = ((eh->got.offset &~ (bfd_vma) 1)
   4318  1.11  christos 			   + htab->etab.sgot->output_offset
   4319  1.11  christos 			   + htab->etab.sgot->output_section->vma);
   4320  1.11  christos 
   4321  1.11  christos 	  /* If this is a -Bsymbolic link and the symbol is defined
   4322  1.11  christos 	     locally or was forced to be local because of a version
   4323  1.11  christos 	     file, we just want to emit a RELATIVE reloc.  The entry
   4324  1.11  christos 	     in the global offset table will already have been
   4325  1.11  christos 	     initialized in the relocate_section function.  */
   4326  1.11  christos 	  if (!is_dyn)
   4327  1.11  christos 	    {
   4328  1.11  christos 	      rela.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (0, R_PARISC_DIR32);
   4329  1.11  christos 	      rela.r_addend = (eh->root.u.def.value
   4330  1.11  christos 			       + eh->root.u.def.section->output_offset
   4331  1.11  christos 			       + eh->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma);
   4332  1.11  christos 	    }
   4333  1.11  christos 	  else
   4334  1.11  christos 	    {
   4335  1.11  christos 	      if ((eh->got.offset & 1) != 0)
   4336  1.11  christos 		abort ();
   4337  1.11  christos 
   4338  1.11  christos 	      bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 0,
   4339  1.11  christos 			  htab->etab.sgot->contents + (eh->got.offset & ~1));
   4340  1.11  christos 	      rela.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (eh->dynindx, R_PARISC_DIR32);
   4341  1.11  christos 	      rela.r_addend = 0;
   4342  1.11  christos 	    }
   4343   1.1     skrll 
   4344  1.11  christos 	  loc = htab->etab.srelgot->contents;
   4345  1.11  christos 	  loc += (htab->etab.srelgot->reloc_count++
   4346  1.11  christos 		  * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela));
   4347  1.11  christos 	  bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &rela, loc);
   4348   1.1     skrll 	}
   4349   1.1     skrll     }
   4350   1.1     skrll 
   4351   1.1     skrll   if (eh->needs_copy)
   4352   1.1     skrll     {
   4353   1.1     skrll       asection *sec;
   4354   1.1     skrll 
   4355   1.1     skrll       /* This symbol needs a copy reloc.  Set it up.  */
   4356   1.1     skrll 
   4357   1.1     skrll       if (! (eh->dynindx != -1
   4358   1.1     skrll 	     && (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defined
   4359   1.1     skrll 		 || eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak)))
   4360   1.1     skrll 	abort ();
   4361   1.1     skrll 
   4362   1.1     skrll       rela.r_offset = (eh->root.u.def.value
   4363   1.1     skrll 		      + eh->root.u.def.section->output_offset
   4364   1.1     skrll 		      + eh->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma);
   4365   1.1     skrll       rela.r_addend = 0;
   4366   1.1     skrll       rela.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (eh->dynindx, R_PARISC_COPY);
   4367  1.11  christos       if (eh->root.u.def.section == htab->etab.sdynrelro)
   4368  1.11  christos 	sec = htab->etab.sreldynrelro;
   4369  1.11  christos       else
   4370  1.11  christos 	sec = htab->etab.srelbss;
   4371   1.1     skrll       loc = sec->contents + sec->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   4372   1.1     skrll       bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &rela, loc);
   4373   1.1     skrll     }
   4374   1.1     skrll 
   4375   1.1     skrll   /* Mark _DYNAMIC and _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ as absolute.  */
   4376   1.7  christos   if (eh == htab->etab.hdynamic || eh == htab->etab.hgot)
   4377   1.1     skrll     {
   4378   1.1     skrll       sym->st_shndx = SHN_ABS;
   4379   1.1     skrll     }
   4380   1.1     skrll 
   4381   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   4382   1.1     skrll }
   4383   1.1     skrll 
   4384   1.1     skrll /* Used to decide how to sort relocs in an optimal manner for the
   4385   1.1     skrll    dynamic linker, before writing them out.  */
   4386   1.1     skrll 
   4387   1.1     skrll static enum elf_reloc_type_class
   4388   1.7  christos elf32_hppa_reloc_type_class (const struct bfd_link_info *info ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
   4389   1.7  christos 			     const asection *rel_sec ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
   4390   1.7  christos 			     const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela)
   4391   1.1     skrll {
   4392   1.1     skrll   /* Handle TLS relocs first; we don't want them to be marked
   4393   1.3  christos      relative by the "if (ELF32_R_SYM (rela->r_info) == STN_UNDEF)"
   4394   1.1     skrll      check below.  */
   4395   1.1     skrll   switch ((int) ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info))
   4396   1.1     skrll     {
   4397   1.1     skrll       case R_PARISC_TLS_DTPMOD32:
   4398   1.1     skrll       case R_PARISC_TLS_DTPOFF32:
   4399   1.1     skrll       case R_PARISC_TLS_TPREL32:
   4400  1.11  christos 	return reloc_class_normal;
   4401   1.1     skrll     }
   4402   1.1     skrll 
   4403   1.3  christos   if (ELF32_R_SYM (rela->r_info) == STN_UNDEF)
   4404   1.1     skrll     return reloc_class_relative;
   4405   1.1     skrll 
   4406   1.1     skrll   switch ((int) ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info))
   4407   1.1     skrll     {
   4408   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_IPLT:
   4409   1.1     skrll       return reloc_class_plt;
   4410   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_COPY:
   4411   1.1     skrll       return reloc_class_copy;
   4412   1.1     skrll     default:
   4413   1.1     skrll       return reloc_class_normal;
   4414   1.1     skrll     }
   4415   1.1     skrll }
   4416   1.1     skrll 
   4417   1.1     skrll /* Finish up the dynamic sections.  */
   4418   1.1     skrll 
   4419   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   4420   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_finish_dynamic_sections (bfd *output_bfd,
   4421   1.1     skrll 				    struct bfd_link_info *info)
   4422   1.1     skrll {
   4423   1.1     skrll   bfd *dynobj;
   4424   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   4425   1.1     skrll   asection *sdyn;
   4426   1.6  christos   asection * sgot;
   4427   1.1     skrll 
   4428   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   4429   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   4430   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   4431   1.3  christos 
   4432   1.1     skrll   dynobj = htab->etab.dynobj;
   4433   1.1     skrll 
   4434  1.11  christos   sgot = htab->etab.sgot;
   4435   1.6  christos   /* A broken linker script might have discarded the dynamic sections.
   4436   1.6  christos      Catch this here so that we do not seg-fault later on.  */
   4437   1.6  christos   if (sgot != NULL && bfd_is_abs_section (sgot->output_section))
   4438   1.6  christos     return FALSE;
   4439   1.6  christos 
   4440   1.6  christos   sdyn = bfd_get_linker_section (dynobj, ".dynamic");
   4441   1.1     skrll 
   4442   1.1     skrll   if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created)
   4443   1.1     skrll     {
   4444   1.1     skrll       Elf32_External_Dyn *dyncon, *dynconend;
   4445   1.1     skrll 
   4446   1.1     skrll       if (sdyn == NULL)
   4447   1.1     skrll 	abort ();
   4448   1.1     skrll 
   4449   1.1     skrll       dyncon = (Elf32_External_Dyn *) sdyn->contents;
   4450   1.1     skrll       dynconend = (Elf32_External_Dyn *) (sdyn->contents + sdyn->size);
   4451   1.1     skrll       for (; dyncon < dynconend; dyncon++)
   4452   1.1     skrll 	{
   4453   1.1     skrll 	  Elf_Internal_Dyn dyn;
   4454   1.1     skrll 	  asection *s;
   4455   1.1     skrll 
   4456   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_elf32_swap_dyn_in (dynobj, dyncon, &dyn);
   4457   1.1     skrll 
   4458   1.1     skrll 	  switch (dyn.d_tag)
   4459   1.1     skrll 	    {
   4460   1.1     skrll 	    default:
   4461   1.1     skrll 	      continue;
   4462   1.1     skrll 
   4463   1.1     skrll 	    case DT_PLTGOT:
   4464   1.1     skrll 	      /* Use PLTGOT to set the GOT register.  */
   4465   1.1     skrll 	      dyn.d_un.d_ptr = elf_gp (output_bfd);
   4466   1.1     skrll 	      break;
   4467   1.1     skrll 
   4468   1.1     skrll 	    case DT_JMPREL:
   4469  1.11  christos 	      s = htab->etab.srelplt;
   4470   1.1     skrll 	      dyn.d_un.d_ptr = s->output_section->vma + s->output_offset;
   4471   1.1     skrll 	      break;
   4472   1.1     skrll 
   4473   1.1     skrll 	    case DT_PLTRELSZ:
   4474  1.11  christos 	      s = htab->etab.srelplt;
   4475   1.1     skrll 	      dyn.d_un.d_val = s->size;
   4476   1.1     skrll 	      break;
   4477   1.1     skrll 	    }
   4478   1.1     skrll 
   4479   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_elf32_swap_dyn_out (output_bfd, &dyn, dyncon);
   4480   1.1     skrll 	}
   4481   1.1     skrll     }
   4482   1.1     skrll 
   4483   1.6  christos   if (sgot != NULL && sgot->size != 0)
   4484   1.1     skrll     {
   4485   1.1     skrll       /* Fill in the first entry in the global offset table.
   4486   1.1     skrll 	 We use it to point to our dynamic section, if we have one.  */
   4487   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (output_bfd,
   4488   1.1     skrll 		  sdyn ? sdyn->output_section->vma + sdyn->output_offset : 0,
   4489   1.6  christos 		  sgot->contents);
   4490   1.1     skrll 
   4491   1.1     skrll       /* The second entry is reserved for use by the dynamic linker.  */
   4492   1.6  christos       memset (sgot->contents + GOT_ENTRY_SIZE, 0, GOT_ENTRY_SIZE);
   4493   1.1     skrll 
   4494   1.1     skrll       /* Set .got entry size.  */
   4495   1.6  christos       elf_section_data (sgot->output_section)
   4496   1.1     skrll 	->this_hdr.sh_entsize = GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   4497   1.1     skrll     }
   4498   1.1     skrll 
   4499  1.11  christos   if (htab->etab.splt != NULL && htab->etab.splt->size != 0)
   4500   1.1     skrll     {
   4501   1.7  christos       /* Set plt entry size to 0 instead of PLT_ENTRY_SIZE, since we add the
   4502   1.7  christos 	 plt stubs and as such the section does not hold a table of fixed-size
   4503   1.7  christos 	 entries.  */
   4504  1.11  christos       elf_section_data (htab->etab.splt->output_section)->this_hdr.sh_entsize = 0;
   4505   1.1     skrll 
   4506   1.1     skrll       if (htab->need_plt_stub)
   4507   1.1     skrll 	{
   4508   1.1     skrll 	  /* Set up the .plt stub.  */
   4509  1.11  christos 	  memcpy (htab->etab.splt->contents
   4510  1.11  christos 		  + htab->etab.splt->size - sizeof (plt_stub),
   4511   1.1     skrll 		  plt_stub, sizeof (plt_stub));
   4512   1.1     skrll 
   4513  1.11  christos 	  if ((htab->etab.splt->output_offset
   4514  1.11  christos 	       + htab->etab.splt->output_section->vma
   4515  1.11  christos 	       + htab->etab.splt->size)
   4516   1.6  christos 	      != (sgot->output_offset
   4517   1.6  christos 		  + sgot->output_section->vma))
   4518   1.1     skrll 	    {
   4519  1.11  christos 	      _bfd_error_handler
   4520   1.1     skrll 		(_(".got section not immediately after .plt section"));
   4521   1.1     skrll 	      return FALSE;
   4522   1.1     skrll 	    }
   4523   1.1     skrll 	}
   4524   1.1     skrll     }
   4525   1.1     skrll 
   4526   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   4527   1.1     skrll }
   4528   1.1     skrll 
   4529   1.1     skrll /* Called when writing out an object file to decide the type of a
   4530   1.1     skrll    symbol.  */
   4531   1.1     skrll static int
   4532   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_elf_get_symbol_type (Elf_Internal_Sym *elf_sym, int type)
   4533   1.1     skrll {
   4534   1.1     skrll   if (ELF_ST_TYPE (elf_sym->st_info) == STT_PARISC_MILLI)
   4535   1.1     skrll     return STT_PARISC_MILLI;
   4536   1.1     skrll   else
   4537   1.1     skrll     return type;
   4538   1.1     skrll }
   4539   1.1     skrll 
   4540   1.1     skrll /* Misc BFD support code.  */
   4541   1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf32_bfd_is_local_label_name    elf_hppa_is_local_label_name
   4542   1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf32_bfd_reloc_type_lookup	     elf_hppa_reloc_type_lookup
   4543   1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf32_bfd_reloc_name_lookup      elf_hppa_reloc_name_lookup
   4544   1.1     skrll #define elf_info_to_howto		     elf_hppa_info_to_howto
   4545   1.1     skrll #define elf_info_to_howto_rel		     elf_hppa_info_to_howto_rel
   4546   1.1     skrll 
   4547   1.1     skrll /* Stuff for the BFD linker.  */
   4548   1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf32_bfd_final_link	     elf32_hppa_final_link
   4549   1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf32_bfd_link_hash_table_create elf32_hppa_link_hash_table_create
   4550   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_adjust_dynamic_symbol    elf32_hppa_adjust_dynamic_symbol
   4551   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_copy_indirect_symbol     elf32_hppa_copy_indirect_symbol
   4552   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_check_relocs	     elf32_hppa_check_relocs
   4553  1.11  christos #define elf_backend_relocs_compatible	     _bfd_elf_relocs_compatible
   4554   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_create_dynamic_sections  elf32_hppa_create_dynamic_sections
   4555   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_fake_sections	     elf_hppa_fake_sections
   4556   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_relocate_section	     elf32_hppa_relocate_section
   4557   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_hide_symbol		     elf32_hppa_hide_symbol
   4558   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_finish_dynamic_symbol    elf32_hppa_finish_dynamic_symbol
   4559   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_finish_dynamic_sections  elf32_hppa_finish_dynamic_sections
   4560   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_size_dynamic_sections    elf32_hppa_size_dynamic_sections
   4561   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_init_index_section	     _bfd_elf_init_1_index_section
   4562   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_gc_mark_hook	     elf32_hppa_gc_mark_hook
   4563   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_grok_prstatus	     elf32_hppa_grok_prstatus
   4564   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_grok_psinfo		     elf32_hppa_grok_psinfo
   4565   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_object_p		     elf32_hppa_object_p
   4566   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_final_write_processing   elf_hppa_final_write_processing
   4567   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_get_symbol_type	     elf32_hppa_elf_get_symbol_type
   4568   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_reloc_type_class	     elf32_hppa_reloc_type_class
   4569   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_action_discarded	     elf_hppa_action_discarded
   4570   1.1     skrll 
   4571   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_can_gc_sections	     1
   4572   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_can_refcount	     1
   4573   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_plt_alignment	     2
   4574   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_want_got_plt	     0
   4575   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_plt_readonly	     0
   4576   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_want_plt_sym	     0
   4577   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_got_header_size	     8
   4578  1.11  christos #define elf_backend_want_dynrelro	     1
   4579   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_rela_normal		     1
   4580  1.11  christos #define elf_backend_dtrel_excludes_plt	     1
   4581  1.11  christos #define elf_backend_no_page_alias	     1
   4582   1.1     skrll 
   4583   1.7  christos #define TARGET_BIG_SYM		hppa_elf32_vec
   4584   1.1     skrll #define TARGET_BIG_NAME		"elf32-hppa"
   4585   1.1     skrll #define ELF_ARCH		bfd_arch_hppa
   4586   1.3  christos #define ELF_TARGET_ID		HPPA32_ELF_DATA
   4587   1.1     skrll #define ELF_MACHINE_CODE	EM_PARISC
   4588   1.1     skrll #define ELF_MAXPAGESIZE		0x1000
   4589   1.1     skrll #define ELF_OSABI		ELFOSABI_HPUX
   4590   1.1     skrll #define elf32_bed		elf32_hppa_hpux_bed
   4591   1.1     skrll 
   4592   1.1     skrll #include "elf32-target.h"
   4593   1.1     skrll 
   4594   1.1     skrll #undef TARGET_BIG_SYM
   4595   1.7  christos #define TARGET_BIG_SYM		hppa_elf32_linux_vec
   4596   1.1     skrll #undef TARGET_BIG_NAME
   4597   1.1     skrll #define TARGET_BIG_NAME		"elf32-hppa-linux"
   4598   1.1     skrll #undef ELF_OSABI
   4599   1.6  christos #define ELF_OSABI		ELFOSABI_GNU
   4600   1.1     skrll #undef elf32_bed
   4601   1.1     skrll #define elf32_bed		elf32_hppa_linux_bed
   4602   1.1     skrll 
   4603   1.1     skrll #include "elf32-target.h"
   4604   1.1     skrll 
   4605   1.1     skrll #undef TARGET_BIG_SYM
   4606   1.7  christos #define TARGET_BIG_SYM		hppa_elf32_nbsd_vec
   4607   1.1     skrll #undef TARGET_BIG_NAME
   4608   1.1     skrll #define TARGET_BIG_NAME		"elf32-hppa-netbsd"
   4609   1.1     skrll #undef ELF_OSABI
   4610   1.1     skrll #define ELF_OSABI		ELFOSABI_NETBSD
   4611   1.1     skrll #undef elf32_bed
   4612   1.1     skrll #define elf32_bed		elf32_hppa_netbsd_bed
   4613   1.1     skrll 
   4614   1.1     skrll #include "elf32-target.h"
   4615